Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
The Project Gutenberg eBook of Portable Flame Thrower M2-
2
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.
Title: Portable Flame Thrower M2-2
Author: United States. War Department
Release date: December 5, 2016 [eBook #53669]
Most recently updated: October 23, 2024
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/53669
Credits: Produced by deaurider, Brian Wilcox and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
file was produced from images generously made available
by The Internet Archive)
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PORTABLE
FLAME THROWER M2-2 ***
2
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.
Title: Portable Flame Thrower M2-2
Author: United States. War Department
Release date: December 5, 2016 [eBook #53669]
Most recently updated: October 23, 2024
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/53669
Credits: Produced by deaurider, Brian Wilcox and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
file was produced from images generously made available
by The Internet Archive)
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PORTABLE
FLAME THROWER M2-2 ***
Page 4
War Department Technical Manual
TM 3-376A
PORTABLE
FLAME THROWER
M2-2
RESTRICTED
DISSEMINATION OF RESTRICTED MATTER. The
information contained in restricted documents and the essential
characteristics of restricted material may be given to any person
known to be in the service of the United States and to persons of
undoubted loyalty and discretion who are cooperating in
Government work, but will not be communicated to the public
or to the press except by authorized military public relations
agencies. (See also par. 18b, AR 380-5, 28 Sep 1942.)
TM 3-376A
PORTABLE
FLAME THROWER
M2-2
RESTRICTED
DISSEMINATION OF RESTRICTED MATTER. The
information contained in restricted documents and the essential
characteristics of restricted material may be given to any person
known to be in the service of the United States and to persons of
undoubted loyalty and discretion who are cooperating in
Government work, but will not be communicated to the public
or to the press except by authorized military public relations
agencies. (See also par. 18b, AR 380-5, 28 Sep 1942.)
Page 5
War Department - 16 May 1944
Washington, D. C.
WAR DEPARTMENT,
Washington, 25, D. C. 16 May 1944
TM 3-376A, Portable Flame Thrower M2-2 is published for the
information and guidance of all concerned.
[A. G. 300.7 (21 March 44)]
By order of the Secretary of War:
G. C. MARSHALL,
Chief of Staff.
Official:
J. A. ULIO,
Major General,
The Adjutant General.
Distribution:
R & H (5); Bn 2, 7, 17 (2); C & H 3 (5); IC & H 5 (5); C 2, 7, 17 (2); X. ID:
T/O & E 72T, Light Div; 17, Armd Div; IR: T/O 5-192, Hq & Hq Co, Engr
Comb Gr; 5-171, Engr Comb Regt; IBn: T/O 5-15, Engr Comb Bn; 5-35,
Engr Bn Sep; 5-175, Engr Bn, Comb Regt; 5-215, Armd Engr Bn; 5-475T,
Engr Bn, Light Div; IC: T/O 5-16, Hq & Hq & Sv Co, Engr Combat Bn; 5-
17, Engr Comb Co; 5-192, Hq & Hq Co, Engr Comb Gr; 5-36, Hq & Hq &
Sv Co, Engr Bn (Sep); 5-37, Co, Engr Bn (Sep); 5-176, Hq & Hq Det, Engr
Bn, Engr Comb Regt; 5-216, Hq & Hq Co, Armd Engr Bn; 5-217, Co,
Armd Engr Bn; 5-476T, Hq & Hq Co, Engr Bn, Light Div; 5477-T, Co,
Engr Bn, Light Div.
Washington, D. C.
WAR DEPARTMENT,
Washington, 25, D. C. 16 May 1944
TM 3-376A, Portable Flame Thrower M2-2 is published for the
information and guidance of all concerned.
[A. G. 300.7 (21 March 44)]
By order of the Secretary of War:
G. C. MARSHALL,
Chief of Staff.
Official:
J. A. ULIO,
Major General,
The Adjutant General.
Distribution:
R & H (5); Bn 2, 7, 17 (2); C & H 3 (5); IC & H 5 (5); C 2, 7, 17 (2); X. ID:
T/O & E 72T, Light Div; 17, Armd Div; IR: T/O 5-192, Hq & Hq Co, Engr
Comb Gr; 5-171, Engr Comb Regt; IBn: T/O 5-15, Engr Comb Bn; 5-35,
Engr Bn Sep; 5-175, Engr Bn, Comb Regt; 5-215, Armd Engr Bn; 5-475T,
Engr Bn, Light Div; IC: T/O 5-16, Hq & Hq & Sv Co, Engr Combat Bn; 5-
17, Engr Comb Co; 5-192, Hq & Hq Co, Engr Comb Gr; 5-36, Hq & Hq &
Sv Co, Engr Bn (Sep); 5-37, Co, Engr Bn (Sep); 5-176, Hq & Hq Det, Engr
Bn, Engr Comb Regt; 5-216, Hq & Hq Co, Armd Engr Bn; 5-217, Co,
Armd Engr Bn; 5-476T, Hq & Hq Co, Engr Bn, Light Div; 5477-T, Co,
Engr Bn, Light Div.
Page 6
(For explanation of symbols see Par 26, FM 21-6)
Page 7
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PORTABLE FLAME THROWER M2-2
WAR DEPARTMENT
Washington, 25, D. C., 16 May 1945
Changes}
No. 1 }
TM 3-376A, 16 May 1944, is changed as follows:
10. ITEMS WITH EACH FLAME THROWER.
* * * * *
b. Kit, spare parts, for portable flame thrower M2-2, assembly B81-6-
190.
* * * * *
g. (Added). Army Service Forces Catalog CW 7-440114, Organizational
Spare Parts and Equipment: 1st and 2d Echelons: for Flame Thrower,
Portable, M2-2.
Fig. 8. Contents of tool kit:
* * * * *
B. 1 Wrench, hex, * * * set screws, H22-49-12.
2 Wrench, hex, 5/32-inch across flats for 5/16-inch
socket-head set screws, H22-49-140.
* * * * *
Fig 9. Contents of spare parts kit:
F. (Added). 3 Tubes, deflector, A81-1-501. (See fig. 39.)
G. (Added). 3 Locknuts, pipe, hex, 1/8-inch, H98-5-382 (for
use with deflector tube). (See fig. 39.)
PORTABLE FLAME THROWER M2-2
WAR DEPARTMENT
Washington, 25, D. C., 16 May 1945
Changes}
No. 1 }
TM 3-376A, 16 May 1944, is changed as follows:
10. ITEMS WITH EACH FLAME THROWER.
* * * * *
b. Kit, spare parts, for portable flame thrower M2-2, assembly B81-6-
190.
* * * * *
g. (Added). Army Service Forces Catalog CW 7-440114, Organizational
Spare Parts and Equipment: 1st and 2d Echelons: for Flame Thrower,
Portable, M2-2.
Fig. 8. Contents of tool kit:
* * * * *
B. 1 Wrench, hex, * * * set screws, H22-49-12.
2 Wrench, hex, 5/32-inch across flats for 5/16-inch
socket-head set screws, H22-49-140.
* * * * *
Fig 9. Contents of spare parts kit:
F. (Added). 3 Tubes, deflector, A81-1-501. (See fig. 39.)
G. (Added). 3 Locknuts, pipe, hex, 1/8-inch, H98-5-382 (for
use with deflector tube). (See fig. 39.)
Page 8
H. (Added). 1 Support, diaphragm, A81-1-428. (See fig. 47.)
12. NEW EQUIPMENT.
* * * * *
m. (Added). New gun may be received with valve spring removed from
barrel and valve assembly. Spring comes tied to barrel. This is done to
prevent strain on valve diaphragm assembly caused by pressure of spring in
gun during storage and shipment. When weapon is being prepared for
operation, spring must be untied from barrel and installed in gun, as
described in paragraph 75.
n. (Added). Pressure regulator may be shipped at zero adjustment to
prevent possibility of strain on diaphragm during shipment and storage. A
regulator shipped in this condition has a tag (tied to the tank coupling)
stating that the regulator is not set. When weapon is received in this
condition, it must be adjusted as described in paragraph 67 before it can be
operated.
*These changes supersede TB 3-376A-1, 19 October 1944.
15. TRAINING.
* * * * *
b. Use of water in training. Water may be used (instead of fuel) for
elementary practice firing. Ignition cylinders are * * * piece, and lubricated
(Par. 49). Use of water, however, should always be supplemented by
firing ignited fuel because water does not give a correct impression of
stream and flame characteristics.
* * * * *
17. CONNECTING TANK GROUP AND GUN GROUP.
* * * * *
a. Place the new * * * to 2 minutes. Slight pressure sometimes builds
up in the fuel tanks, even though the pressure-tank valve has not been
12. NEW EQUIPMENT.
* * * * *
m. (Added). New gun may be received with valve spring removed from
barrel and valve assembly. Spring comes tied to barrel. This is done to
prevent strain on valve diaphragm assembly caused by pressure of spring in
gun during storage and shipment. When weapon is being prepared for
operation, spring must be untied from barrel and installed in gun, as
described in paragraph 75.
n. (Added). Pressure regulator may be shipped at zero adjustment to
prevent possibility of strain on diaphragm during shipment and storage. A
regulator shipped in this condition has a tag (tied to the tank coupling)
stating that the regulator is not set. When weapon is received in this
condition, it must be adjusted as described in paragraph 67 before it can be
operated.
*These changes supersede TB 3-376A-1, 19 October 1944.
15. TRAINING.
* * * * *
b. Use of water in training. Water may be used (instead of fuel) for
elementary practice firing. Ignition cylinders are * * * piece, and lubricated
(Par. 49). Use of water, however, should always be supplemented by
firing ignited fuel because water does not give a correct impression of
stream and flame characteristics.
* * * * *
17. CONNECTING TANK GROUP AND GUN GROUP.
* * * * *
a. Place the new * * * to 2 minutes. Slight pressure sometimes builds
up in the fuel tanks, even though the pressure-tank valve has not been
Page 9
opened, and causes some overflow of fuel when the coupling plug is
removed. This pressure may be relieved by—
(1) Standing the tank group upright.
(2) Slightly opening filling plug on top of fuel tanks to bleed the
pressure.
(3) Closing the opening at filling plug and tightening it with wrench.
* * * * *
18. LOADING WITH IGNITION CYLINDER.
* * * * *
b. Precautions. Care must be * * * front of gun. Do not ignite the
ignition cartridge until the weapon is to be fired at the target.
* * * * *
30. AFTER FIRING.
When the firer * * * mission, he should:
a. First, remove and discard the ignition cylinder, as the ignition
cylinder should never be present when blowing out fuel or after
blowing out fuel except when preparing for a new mission. To remove
cylinder, proceed as follows:
* * * * *
b. Close the pressure-tank valve by turning valve handle clockwise (to
conserve remaining pressure in pressure tank) only if additional shots are
to be fired before refilling and recharging.
c. If no additional shots are to be fired before refilling and
recharging, open pressure-tank valve by turning handle
counterclockwise. Point the gun away from personnel and blow out the
remaining fuel and pressure, if any, from the fuel tanks by squeezing the
valve lever and grip safety until there is no further discharge. The trigger
should not be used during this operation. Then close the pressure-tank
valve to prevent entrance of foreign matter into the pressure system.
removed. This pressure may be relieved by—
(1) Standing the tank group upright.
(2) Slightly opening filling plug on top of fuel tanks to bleed the
pressure.
(3) Closing the opening at filling plug and tightening it with wrench.
* * * * *
18. LOADING WITH IGNITION CYLINDER.
* * * * *
b. Precautions. Care must be * * * front of gun. Do not ignite the
ignition cartridge until the weapon is to be fired at the target.
* * * * *
30. AFTER FIRING.
When the firer * * * mission, he should:
a. First, remove and discard the ignition cylinder, as the ignition
cylinder should never be present when blowing out fuel or after
blowing out fuel except when preparing for a new mission. To remove
cylinder, proceed as follows:
* * * * *
b. Close the pressure-tank valve by turning valve handle clockwise (to
conserve remaining pressure in pressure tank) only if additional shots are
to be fired before refilling and recharging.
c. If no additional shots are to be fired before refilling and
recharging, open pressure-tank valve by turning handle
counterclockwise. Point the gun away from personnel and blow out the
remaining fuel and pressure, if any, from the fuel tanks by squeezing the
valve lever and grip safety until there is no further discharge. The trigger
should not be used during this operation. Then close the pressure-tank
valve to prevent entrance of foreign matter into the pressure system.
Page 10
d. (Superseded). Carefully remove tank group from the back. This may
be done most easily by sitting or squatting with back to a tree stump, flat
rock, packing box, or other object. Release the body and shoulder straps and
ease tank group off the back. Avoid dropping equipment on the ground as
this may damage it.
* * * * *
31. IGNITION CYLINDER.
* * * * *
c. Packing. Ignition cylinders are * * * each flame thrower. Fifty cans
(100 ignition cylinders) are contained in each ignition cylinder packing
box. Wooden packing box with contents weighs approximately 50 to 55
pounds. Outside dimensions of the box are approximately 16-1/4 inches
by 14-3/4 inches by 10-1/4 inches. Cubage is 1-3/12 cubic feet.
* * * * *
32. CHARGING PRESSURE TANK.
* * * * *
b. Charging from air compressor. Compressor, air, gasoline * * *
cylinders as well. Instructions for use of the compressor will be found in
TM 3-377.
* * * * *
Figure 23. Charging two pressure tanks, using charging and filling lines, and cylinders of
compressed air or nitrogen. As many as four pressure tank and valve assemblies, on or off
tank groups, can be charged at one time from cylinders coupled as shown in figure 24.
33. PRECAUTIONS WHEN PRESSURE-CHARGING.
* * * * *
m. (Added). Inspect carefully to be certain that no traces of grease, flame
thrower fuel, oil, dirt, or other foreign matter are present in flame thrower
pressure tanks, outlets of air compressor, connections, hose, or cylinders
containing compressed air.
be done most easily by sitting or squatting with back to a tree stump, flat
rock, packing box, or other object. Release the body and shoulder straps and
ease tank group off the back. Avoid dropping equipment on the ground as
this may damage it.
* * * * *
31. IGNITION CYLINDER.
* * * * *
c. Packing. Ignition cylinders are * * * each flame thrower. Fifty cans
(100 ignition cylinders) are contained in each ignition cylinder packing
box. Wooden packing box with contents weighs approximately 50 to 55
pounds. Outside dimensions of the box are approximately 16-1/4 inches
by 14-3/4 inches by 10-1/4 inches. Cubage is 1-3/12 cubic feet.
* * * * *
32. CHARGING PRESSURE TANK.
* * * * *
b. Charging from air compressor. Compressor, air, gasoline * * *
cylinders as well. Instructions for use of the compressor will be found in
TM 3-377.
* * * * *
Figure 23. Charging two pressure tanks, using charging and filling lines, and cylinders of
compressed air or nitrogen. As many as four pressure tank and valve assemblies, on or off
tank groups, can be charged at one time from cylinders coupled as shown in figure 24.
33. PRECAUTIONS WHEN PRESSURE-CHARGING.
* * * * *
m. (Added). Inspect carefully to be certain that no traces of grease, flame
thrower fuel, oil, dirt, or other foreign matter are present in flame thrower
pressure tanks, outlets of air compressor, connections, hose, or cylinders
containing compressed air.
Page 11
n. (Added). Hands and tools must be free of oil or grease when charging
or servicing flame thrower pressure systems.
o. (Added). Discharge any remaining compressed air in flame thrower
pressure tanks before recharging.
p. (Added). If compressed air is to be used, and if any grease, oil, or
flame thrower fuel is detected by sense of smell or sight within pressure
tank and valve assemblies or cylinders, return tanks or cylinders for
cleaning to the appropriate third-echelon maintenance agency of Chemical
Warfare Service.
35.1 PEPTIZED FUELS (Added).
a. Characteristics.
(1) Pour more readily than usual thickened fuels.
(2) Give a larger diameter flame than thickened fuels.
(3) Give longer effective ranges than liquid fuels.
(4) Prepared more quickly in cool temperatures than thickened fuels.
b. Preparation.
(1) Open 5-1/4-pound can or cans of thickener.
(2) Add 2 mess kit spoonfuls of water to each can of thickener. Stir until
the water disappears in the thickener. It is not necessary to mix the water
uniformly with all of the thickener.
(3) Proceed at once as directed in paragraph 35. Avoid accidental addition
of any water to the thickener or fuel other than that stated in (2) above.
(4) Peptized fuels set a little more quickly than the usual thickened fuels,
but their general appearance after setting is the same. After standing,
however, peptized fuels spontaneously become thinner and may be poured
without use of pressure. The time it takes for thinning to occur depends on
the temperature of the fuel. At 75° Fahrenheit or higher, thinning occurs in
approximately 1 to 2 hours. At temperatures below 60° Fahrenheit, thinning
occurs several days after preparation of the peptized fuel.
or servicing flame thrower pressure systems.
o. (Added). Discharge any remaining compressed air in flame thrower
pressure tanks before recharging.
p. (Added). If compressed air is to be used, and if any grease, oil, or
flame thrower fuel is detected by sense of smell or sight within pressure
tank and valve assemblies or cylinders, return tanks or cylinders for
cleaning to the appropriate third-echelon maintenance agency of Chemical
Warfare Service.
35.1 PEPTIZED FUELS (Added).
a. Characteristics.
(1) Pour more readily than usual thickened fuels.
(2) Give a larger diameter flame than thickened fuels.
(3) Give longer effective ranges than liquid fuels.
(4) Prepared more quickly in cool temperatures than thickened fuels.
b. Preparation.
(1) Open 5-1/4-pound can or cans of thickener.
(2) Add 2 mess kit spoonfuls of water to each can of thickener. Stir until
the water disappears in the thickener. It is not necessary to mix the water
uniformly with all of the thickener.
(3) Proceed at once as directed in paragraph 35. Avoid accidental addition
of any water to the thickener or fuel other than that stated in (2) above.
(4) Peptized fuels set a little more quickly than the usual thickened fuels,
but their general appearance after setting is the same. After standing,
however, peptized fuels spontaneously become thinner and may be poured
without use of pressure. The time it takes for thinning to occur depends on
the temperature of the fuel. At 75° Fahrenheit or higher, thinning occurs in
approximately 1 to 2 hours. At temperatures below 60° Fahrenheit, thinning
occurs several days after preparation of the peptized fuel.
Page 12
(5) If water has accidentally gotten into fuel before addition of the
thickener, peptizing action takes place, but the results are unpredictable
because the quantity of water added is not controlled.
36. PREPARATION OF LIQUID FUELS.
a. Choice of ingredients. Thin fuels are * * * reaching the target. For this
reason, liquid fuels should contain the lowest proportion of gasoline and the
highest proportion of heavier fuels that permit easy ignition. In hot climates,
* * * of great importance. The gasoline used can be any U. S. grade of
motor fuel or aviation gasoline. Suitable blends are as follows:
* * * * *
(3) (Added). By volume, 20 to 25 percent gasoline and 75 to 80 percent
light fuel oil.
* * * * *
40.1 USE OF PACKBOARDS (Added).
Detachable pressure tank and valve assemblies (par. 66.1) make possible
the use of packboards for transporting pressure tanks, 5-gallon cans of fuel,
wrenches, and additional ignition cylinders close to the front line of combat
to troops using flame throwers. As packboards are not manufactured
specifically for servicing flame throwers, standard quartermaster-issue
packboards are used. Packboard transportation is practicable only with
pourable fuel. (Pourable fuels include some thickened fuels and all liquid
fuels.)
a. The following is a suggested procedure for packboard transportation:
(1) Lash all necessary filling and charging supplies for one flame thrower
to packboard, using lashing rope and straps.
(2) Tie one pressure tank and valve assembly to top of one flat 5-gallon
fuel can so that flexible shaft and handle hang down parallel to one side of
the fuel can.
(3) Carry wrench with large enough opening to unscrew filling plugs
from tops of fuel tanks and to tighten plugs after filling.
thickener, peptizing action takes place, but the results are unpredictable
because the quantity of water added is not controlled.
36. PREPARATION OF LIQUID FUELS.
a. Choice of ingredients. Thin fuels are * * * reaching the target. For this
reason, liquid fuels should contain the lowest proportion of gasoline and the
highest proportion of heavier fuels that permit easy ignition. In hot climates,
* * * of great importance. The gasoline used can be any U. S. grade of
motor fuel or aviation gasoline. Suitable blends are as follows:
* * * * *
(3) (Added). By volume, 20 to 25 percent gasoline and 75 to 80 percent
light fuel oil.
* * * * *
40.1 USE OF PACKBOARDS (Added).
Detachable pressure tank and valve assemblies (par. 66.1) make possible
the use of packboards for transporting pressure tanks, 5-gallon cans of fuel,
wrenches, and additional ignition cylinders close to the front line of combat
to troops using flame throwers. As packboards are not manufactured
specifically for servicing flame throwers, standard quartermaster-issue
packboards are used. Packboard transportation is practicable only with
pourable fuel. (Pourable fuels include some thickened fuels and all liquid
fuels.)
a. The following is a suggested procedure for packboard transportation:
(1) Lash all necessary filling and charging supplies for one flame thrower
to packboard, using lashing rope and straps.
(2) Tie one pressure tank and valve assembly to top of one flat 5-gallon
fuel can so that flexible shaft and handle hang down parallel to one side of
the fuel can.
(3) Carry wrench with large enough opening to unscrew filling plugs
from tops of fuel tanks and to tighten plugs after filling.
Page 13
(4) Carry extra ignition cylinders.
b. Return empty pressure tank and valve assembly along with empty fuel
can and wrench on packboard to flame thrower servicing point.
c. If a supply of flame thrower tank groups is available, they may be
preferred to the packboard method of transportation. Tank groups are easy
to carry, and a filled and charged tank group can replace an emptied one as
quickly as packboard method can be used to service flame thrower.
* * * * *
48. SERVICE KIT.
* * * * *
a. Tools.
* * * * *
1 Screw driver, common, * * * blade diameter, H22-50-6.
(Fig. 8.)
2 Wrenches, hex, 5/32 inch across flats (for 5/16-inch
socket-head set screws), H22-49-140. (See B, fig. 8.)
2 Wrenches, hex, * * * set screws), H22-49-91.
* * * * *
b. Accessories and spare parts.
* * * * *
1 Tank and valve, pressure, assembly (less valve shaft
assembly, B81-1-883) B81-1-879. (See fig. 35.2.)
1 Shaft, valve, assembly B-81-1-883. (See fig. 35.2.)
2 Case, spring, assemblies B81-1-444. (Fig. 9.)
* * * * *
1 Regulator, pressure, assembly (Grove type) B81-1-778.
(Fig. 35.2.)
b. Return empty pressure tank and valve assembly along with empty fuel
can and wrench on packboard to flame thrower servicing point.
c. If a supply of flame thrower tank groups is available, they may be
preferred to the packboard method of transportation. Tank groups are easy
to carry, and a filled and charged tank group can replace an emptied one as
quickly as packboard method can be used to service flame thrower.
* * * * *
48. SERVICE KIT.
* * * * *
a. Tools.
* * * * *
1 Screw driver, common, * * * blade diameter, H22-50-6.
(Fig. 8.)
2 Wrenches, hex, 5/32 inch across flats (for 5/16-inch
socket-head set screws), H22-49-140. (See B, fig. 8.)
2 Wrenches, hex, * * * set screws), H22-49-91.
* * * * *
b. Accessories and spare parts.
* * * * *
1 Tank and valve, pressure, assembly (less valve shaft
assembly, B81-1-883) B81-1-879. (See fig. 35.2.)
1 Shaft, valve, assembly B-81-1-883. (See fig. 35.2.)
2 Case, spring, assemblies B81-1-444. (Fig. 9.)
* * * * *
1 Regulator, pressure, assembly (Grove type) B81-1-778.
(Fig. 35.2.)
Page 14
1 Compound, anti-seize, white * * * 1/4-pound can, H99-3-
12.
2 Gages, pressure * * * assembly B81-6-90. (Fig. 32.)
6 Tubes, deflector, A81-1-501. (See fig. 39.)
6 Locknuts, pipe, hex, 1/8-inch, H98-5-382. (See fig. 39.)
2 Supports, diaphragm, A81-1-428. (See fig. 47.)
6 Springs, R81-1-922 (for socket). (See fig. 35.8.)
6 Washers, backing, R81-1-924 (brass washer for socket).
(See fig. 35.8.)
12 Washers, B81-1-923 (synthetic rubber washer for
socket). (See fig. 35.8.)
6 Caps, plug, B81-1-926 (with chain) (dust cap for plug).
(See fig. 35.3.)
12 Nuts, wing, A81-1-877. (See fig. 35.4.)
2 Army Service Forces Catalogs CW 6-445115, Sets of
Tools, Equipment, and Similar Material: Kit, service,
for Portable Flame Thrower, M2-2.
2 Army Service Forces Catalogs CW 7-440114,
Organizational Spare Parts and Equipment: 1st and
2d Echelons: for Flame Thrower, Portable, M2-2.
2 War Department Technical Manuals 3-376A, Portable
Flame Thrower M2-2.
49. LUBRICATION.
a. Gun group.
* * * * *
(2) Frequency of lubrication. The surfaces of * * * lubricated before
reassembly. Do not soak or wash the spring case assembly in solvent
because this may remove the grease which is factory packed in the
12.
2 Gages, pressure * * * assembly B81-6-90. (Fig. 32.)
6 Tubes, deflector, A81-1-501. (See fig. 39.)
6 Locknuts, pipe, hex, 1/8-inch, H98-5-382. (See fig. 39.)
2 Supports, diaphragm, A81-1-428. (See fig. 47.)
6 Springs, R81-1-922 (for socket). (See fig. 35.8.)
6 Washers, backing, R81-1-924 (brass washer for socket).
(See fig. 35.8.)
12 Washers, B81-1-923 (synthetic rubber washer for
socket). (See fig. 35.8.)
6 Caps, plug, B81-1-926 (with chain) (dust cap for plug).
(See fig. 35.3.)
12 Nuts, wing, A81-1-877. (See fig. 35.4.)
2 Army Service Forces Catalogs CW 6-445115, Sets of
Tools, Equipment, and Similar Material: Kit, service,
for Portable Flame Thrower, M2-2.
2 Army Service Forces Catalogs CW 7-440114,
Organizational Spare Parts and Equipment: 1st and
2d Echelons: for Flame Thrower, Portable, M2-2.
2 War Department Technical Manuals 3-376A, Portable
Flame Thrower M2-2.
49. LUBRICATION.
a. Gun group.
* * * * *
(2) Frequency of lubrication. The surfaces of * * * lubricated before
reassembly. Do not soak or wash the spring case assembly in solvent
because this may remove the grease which is factory packed in the
Page 15
spring case assembly. This grease cannot be replaced. To clean spring
case assembly, wide outside surfaces with cloth saturated with solvent.
* * * * *
53. SERVICE WHEN FILLING AND CHARGING.
* * * * *
d. Testing for leaks in pressure system. After charging and * * * to test
pressure. (Fig. 32.) To install gage, unscrew check-valve cap, moisten end
of check valve with water or saliva, and screw gage in check-valve body.
Use of water or saliva as lubricant prevents cutting of the rubber
washer by the check valve. If pressure has * * * and then retested.
66. PRESSURE TANK AND VALVE ASSEMBLY.
a. Description and functioning. The pressure tank * * * assembly (Fig.
33) includes:
(1) Pressure tank. The pressure tank * * * the fuel tanks. The pressure-
tank clamp may be adjusted to different outside diameters of pressure
tanks by means of a nut and screw tightening device (fig. 35.1) or by
means of a stepped ring at end of clamp.
case assembly, wide outside surfaces with cloth saturated with solvent.
* * * * *
53. SERVICE WHEN FILLING AND CHARGING.
* * * * *
d. Testing for leaks in pressure system. After charging and * * * to test
pressure. (Fig. 32.) To install gage, unscrew check-valve cap, moisten end
of check valve with water or saliva, and screw gage in check-valve body.
Use of water or saliva as lubricant prevents cutting of the rubber
washer by the check valve. If pressure has * * * and then retested.
66. PRESSURE TANK AND VALVE ASSEMBLY.
a. Description and functioning. The pressure tank * * * assembly (Fig.
33) includes:
(1) Pressure tank. The pressure tank * * * the fuel tanks. The pressure-
tank clamp may be adjusted to different outside diameters of pressure
tanks by means of a nut and screw tightening device (fig. 35.1) or by
means of a stepped ring at end of clamp.
Page 16
Figure 35.1. (Added.) Adjustable pressure tank clamp, showing use of
nut and screw tightening device.
* * * * *
b. Removal. (Fig. 33.)
* * * * *
(2) Removal procedure.
* * * * *
(h) (Added). To remove check valve, unscrew check valve cap and check
valve body, using wrenches.
c. Installation. (Figs. 33 and 39.)
* * * * *
(7) (Added). To install check valve, apply thread compound lightly to
threads of cheek valve body and screw into opening in pressure-tank valve.
Tighten check valve body in position, using wrench. Screw check valve cap
on check valve body and tighten with wrench.
nut and screw tightening device.
* * * * *
b. Removal. (Fig. 33.)
* * * * *
(2) Removal procedure.
* * * * *
(h) (Added). To remove check valve, unscrew check valve cap and check
valve body, using wrenches.
c. Installation. (Figs. 33 and 39.)
* * * * *
(7) (Added). To install check valve, apply thread compound lightly to
threads of cheek valve body and screw into opening in pressure-tank valve.
Tighten check valve body in position, using wrench. Screw check valve cap
on check valve body and tighten with wrench.
Page 17
* * * * *
66.1 DETACHABLE PRESSURE TANK AND VALVE ASSEMBLIES
(Added).
Newly developed detachable pressure tank and valve assemblies provide
an improved and speedier method of servicing M2-2 portable flame
throwers in forward combat zones.
a. Description and functioning.
(1) Detachable pressure tank and valve assemblies (figs. 35.2 and 35.3)
are used in modified flame throwers. They make it unnecessary to replace
empty complete tank groups with filled and charged complete tank groups.
(2) Replacement of complete tank group, however, may be preferred
when an extra supply of tank groups is available, or if thickened fuel is too
stringy and viscous to pour.
(3) Detachable pressure tank and valve assemblies can be attached only
to flame throwers which include sockets (figs. 35.2 and 35.3) and shortened
regulator tubes. Flame throwers produced recently include this design
modification.
(4) A plug and cap (fig. 35.3) on detachable pressure tank and valve
assembly replace tube elbow (fig. 33) used on nondetachable pressure tank
and valve assembly.
b. Removal. Care must be taken to prevent damage to connections during
removal and installation. The procedure for removal of pressure tank and
valve assembly is as follows:
(1) Close pressure-tank valve. Press valve lever and safety grip on gun to
release all pressure from fuel system and gun.
(2) Unscrew wing nut from valve flexible shaft. (See fig. 35.4.) Be
careful not to misplace wing nut.
(3) Pull clamp and shaft from stud which is welded on fuel tank.
(4) With one hand under pressure tank, unclamp but do not fully open
pressure-tank clamp.
66.1 DETACHABLE PRESSURE TANK AND VALVE ASSEMBLIES
(Added).
Newly developed detachable pressure tank and valve assemblies provide
an improved and speedier method of servicing M2-2 portable flame
throwers in forward combat zones.
a. Description and functioning.
(1) Detachable pressure tank and valve assemblies (figs. 35.2 and 35.3)
are used in modified flame throwers. They make it unnecessary to replace
empty complete tank groups with filled and charged complete tank groups.
(2) Replacement of complete tank group, however, may be preferred
when an extra supply of tank groups is available, or if thickened fuel is too
stringy and viscous to pour.
(3) Detachable pressure tank and valve assemblies can be attached only
to flame throwers which include sockets (figs. 35.2 and 35.3) and shortened
regulator tubes. Flame throwers produced recently include this design
modification.
(4) A plug and cap (fig. 35.3) on detachable pressure tank and valve
assembly replace tube elbow (fig. 33) used on nondetachable pressure tank
and valve assembly.
b. Removal. Care must be taken to prevent damage to connections during
removal and installation. The procedure for removal of pressure tank and
valve assembly is as follows:
(1) Close pressure-tank valve. Press valve lever and safety grip on gun to
release all pressure from fuel system and gun.
(2) Unscrew wing nut from valve flexible shaft. (See fig. 35.4.) Be
careful not to misplace wing nut.
(3) Pull clamp and shaft from stud which is welded on fuel tank.
(4) With one hand under pressure tank, unclamp but do not fully open
pressure-tank clamp.
Page 18
(5) Supporting pressure tank valve with top of right hand, push knurled
socket in and away from pressure tank valve. Left hand may be placed at
back of regulator tube so that tube does not bend away from socket. (See
fig. 35.5.) Pull out pressure tank and valve assembly.
Figure 35.2. (Added.) Pressure system disassembled, showing removable
pressure tank and valve assembly, nomenclature, and Chemical Warfare
Service stock numbers.
socket in and away from pressure tank valve. Left hand may be placed at
back of regulator tube so that tube does not bend away from socket. (See
fig. 35.5.) Pull out pressure tank and valve assembly.
Figure 35.2. (Added.) Pressure system disassembled, showing removable
pressure tank and valve assembly, nomenclature, and Chemical Warfare
Service stock numbers.
Page 19
Figure 35.3. (Added.) Detachable pressure tank and valve assembly,
connected to modified regulator tube assembly.
connected to modified regulator tube assembly.
Page 20
Figure 35.4. (Added.) Removing wing nut to free valve flexible shaft.
Page 21
Figure 35.5. (Added.) Pushing knurled socket away from pressure tank,
permitting pressure tank and valve assembly to be removed from tank
group.
(6) Put cap as far as it will go over opening of the plug. (See fig.35.6.)
This prevents dust and other foreign matter from entering empty pressure
tank.
(7) Flame thrower is now ready to receive a charged pressure tank and
valve assembly. (See fig. 35.7.)
permitting pressure tank and valve assembly to be removed from tank
group.
(6) Put cap as far as it will go over opening of the plug. (See fig.35.6.)
This prevents dust and other foreign matter from entering empty pressure
tank.
(7) Flame thrower is now ready to receive a charged pressure tank and
valve assembly. (See fig. 35.7.)
Page 22
c. Installation. To install a charged or replacement detachable pressure
tank and valve assembly, proceed as follows:
(1) Remove dust cap from plug of charged pressure tank and valve
assembly. (Never open pressure-tank valve with cap on plug.)
Figure 35.6. (Added.) Pressure tank and valve assembly with dust cap
over plug opening.
(2) Support socket and tube with left hand and insert plug in socket with
right hand. If tube is not supported, it is difficult to lock the plug in the
socket and it is possible that tube may become bent. Press bottom of tank
until plug snaps into socket. Test by attempting to pull tank and plug from
socket. Plug must not pull out; if it does, insert again and press bottom of
tank. Grasp knurled collar of socket and test for end play. If collar slides
tank and valve assembly, proceed as follows:
(1) Remove dust cap from plug of charged pressure tank and valve
assembly. (Never open pressure-tank valve with cap on plug.)
Figure 35.6. (Added.) Pressure tank and valve assembly with dust cap
over plug opening.
(2) Support socket and tube with left hand and insert plug in socket with
right hand. If tube is not supported, it is difficult to lock the plug in the
socket and it is possible that tube may become bent. Press bottom of tank
until plug snaps into socket. Test by attempting to pull tank and plug from
socket. Plug must not pull out; if it does, insert again and press bottom of
tank. Grasp knurled collar of socket and test for end play. If collar slides
Page 23
freely back and forth on socket, the connection is not tight and plug should
be pressed in farther.
Figure 35.7. (Added.) Tank group, ready to receive a charged pressure
tank and valve assembly.
(3) Replace small clamp (valve-stem clamp) over stud projecting from
fuel tank, and screw wing nut on stud to secure valve flexible shaft in place.
Do not use wrench on wing nut.
be pressed in farther.
Figure 35.7. (Added.) Tank group, ready to receive a charged pressure
tank and valve assembly.
(3) Replace small clamp (valve-stem clamp) over stud projecting from
fuel tank, and screw wing nut on stud to secure valve flexible shaft in place.
Do not use wrench on wing nut.
Page 24
d. Maintenance. Follow maintenance instructions given in paragraph 66.
In addition, if leaks occur and signs of wear are visible, carry out the
following procedures:
(1) Worn washer. Replace synthetic rubber washer by disassembling
socket (fig. 35.8), prying out washer, placing new washer in position, and
reassembling socket.
Figure 35.8. (Added.) Cutaway view of socket and plug. Disassembly is
permitted only as directed in paragraph 66.1.
(2) Damaged plug. Repair damaged or nicked end of plug by filing plug
end square and smooth. File off as little as possible. Test for leakage at
socket by installing pressure tank and valve assembly, as in c above, and
then opening pressure-tank valve. If leak persists at joint between socket
In addition, if leaks occur and signs of wear are visible, carry out the
following procedures:
(1) Worn washer. Replace synthetic rubber washer by disassembling
socket (fig. 35.8), prying out washer, placing new washer in position, and
reassembling socket.
Figure 35.8. (Added.) Cutaway view of socket and plug. Disassembly is
permitted only as directed in paragraph 66.1.
(2) Damaged plug. Repair damaged or nicked end of plug by filing plug
end square and smooth. File off as little as possible. Test for leakage at
socket by installing pressure tank and valve assembly, as in c above, and
then opening pressure-tank valve. If leak persists at joint between socket
Page 25
and plug, replace plug by unscrewing old plug, screwing new plug in
position, and tightening with wrench. Replace entire plug. Do not attempt to
unscrew the cylindrical portion from the square portion.
67. PRESSURE REGULATOR.
* * * * *
e. Maintenance (Added).
(1) Spring type (Hoke) pressure regulator. Except for adjustment to
increase or decrease pressure, do not attempt to maintain or repair the
spring type (Hoke) pressure regulator. If damaged or defective, it must be
replaced by a dome type (Grove) pressure regulator.
(2) Dome type (Grove) pressure regulator (B81-1-778). Replacement
parts for maintaining the dome type (Grove) regulator are available for use
by chemical maintenance companies, as shown in Army Service Forces
Catalog CW 9-440114, List of All Service Parts and Higher Echelon Spare
Parts for Flame Thrower, Portable, M2-2 (25 November 1944).
74. VALVE GRIP.
* * * * *
c. Installing valve grip.
(1) Place grip safety * * * right valve grip. (Fig. 48.) Do not accidentally
place the lower forward extension of the grip safety over the lower rear
extension of the valve lever. If this overlapping occurs, the small
projection at the bottom of the grip safety may be broken off. Be sure
the * * * of grip safety.
* * * * *
77. SHIPMENT AND STORAGE.
* * * * *
c. Class of supply (Added). The portable flame thrower is a class IV
supply item.
position, and tightening with wrench. Replace entire plug. Do not attempt to
unscrew the cylindrical portion from the square portion.
67. PRESSURE REGULATOR.
* * * * *
e. Maintenance (Added).
(1) Spring type (Hoke) pressure regulator. Except for adjustment to
increase or decrease pressure, do not attempt to maintain or repair the
spring type (Hoke) pressure regulator. If damaged or defective, it must be
replaced by a dome type (Grove) pressure regulator.
(2) Dome type (Grove) pressure regulator (B81-1-778). Replacement
parts for maintaining the dome type (Grove) regulator are available for use
by chemical maintenance companies, as shown in Army Service Forces
Catalog CW 9-440114, List of All Service Parts and Higher Echelon Spare
Parts for Flame Thrower, Portable, M2-2 (25 November 1944).
74. VALVE GRIP.
* * * * *
c. Installing valve grip.
(1) Place grip safety * * * right valve grip. (Fig. 48.) Do not accidentally
place the lower forward extension of the grip safety over the lower rear
extension of the valve lever. If this overlapping occurs, the small
projection at the bottom of the grip safety may be broken off. Be sure
the * * * of grip safety.
* * * * *
77. SHIPMENT AND STORAGE.
* * * * *
c. Class of supply (Added). The portable flame thrower is a class IV
supply item.
Page 26
78. REFERENCES.
Reference pertaining to * * * flame throwers include:
* * * * *
TM 9-850 Cleaning, Preserving, Lubricating * * * the
Ordnance Department
TM 3-377, Compressor, Air, Gasoline Engine-driven,
7CFM, M1 (For Charging Flame Throwers
and Cylinders)
TB CW 18, Kit, Fuel Filling, Flame Thrower, E6 (for
filling mechanized and portable flame
throwers)*
TB CW 20, Cleaning Interiors of Compressed Gas
Cylinders, Tanks, and Accessories*
TB ENG 39, Safe Handling of Compressed Gases*
ASF Catalog CW 7-440114, Organizational Spare Parts
and Equipment: 1st and 2d Echelons: for
Flame Thrower, Portable, M2-2 (25
November 1944)
ASF Catalog CW 9-440114, List of all Service Parts and
Higher Echelon Spare Parts for Flame
Thrower, Portable, M2-2
ASF Catalog CW 6-445115, Sets of Tools, Equipment, and
Similar Material: Kit, Service, for Portable
Flame Thrower, M2-2
ASF Catalog CW 9-445115, List of all Parts and Higher
Echelon Spare Parts for Kit, Service, for
Portable Flame Thrower, M2-2
FS 3-33, Portable Flame Thrower M2-2, Part 1,
Nomenclature and Operation.
* Technical Bulletins are to be superseded by appropriate War Department
manuals or changes to manuals.
Reference pertaining to * * * flame throwers include:
* * * * *
TM 9-850 Cleaning, Preserving, Lubricating * * * the
Ordnance Department
TM 3-377, Compressor, Air, Gasoline Engine-driven,
7CFM, M1 (For Charging Flame Throwers
and Cylinders)
TB CW 18, Kit, Fuel Filling, Flame Thrower, E6 (for
filling mechanized and portable flame
throwers)*
TB CW 20, Cleaning Interiors of Compressed Gas
Cylinders, Tanks, and Accessories*
TB ENG 39, Safe Handling of Compressed Gases*
ASF Catalog CW 7-440114, Organizational Spare Parts
and Equipment: 1st and 2d Echelons: for
Flame Thrower, Portable, M2-2 (25
November 1944)
ASF Catalog CW 9-440114, List of all Service Parts and
Higher Echelon Spare Parts for Flame
Thrower, Portable, M2-2
ASF Catalog CW 6-445115, Sets of Tools, Equipment, and
Similar Material: Kit, Service, for Portable
Flame Thrower, M2-2
ASF Catalog CW 9-445115, List of all Parts and Higher
Echelon Spare Parts for Kit, Service, for
Portable Flame Thrower, M2-2
FS 3-33, Portable Flame Thrower M2-2, Part 1,
Nomenclature and Operation.
* Technical Bulletins are to be superseded by appropriate War Department
manuals or changes to manuals.
Page 27
[AG 300.7 (11 Apr 45)]
By order of the Secretary of War:
G. C. MARSHALL
Chief of Staff
Official:
J. A. ULIO
Major General
The Adjutant General
Distribution:
AAF (Cml O) (10); AGF (Cml O) (10); ASF (2); T of Opn
(Cml O) (10); Arm & Sv Bds (1); Def Comd (2); S Div
ASF (1); Tech Sv (2) except CWS (45); SvC (Cml O) (4);
PE (Attn: Cml O) (2); Sub-PE (Cml O) (2); PG (2); Ars 3
(2); ASF Dep (CW Sec) (2); ASF Dep (2); Dep 3 (2); Pro
Dist 3 (2); Tech Sv C (2); USMA (20); Tng C (2); A (2);
CHQ (5); B (1); R (5); Bn 2 (2), 3 (5), 7, 17 (2); C 2 (2), 3
(5), 7, 17 (2); AF (2); W (Cml O) (1); Five (5) copies to
each of the following: T/O & E 5-15; 5-16; 5-17; 5-35; 5-
36; 5-37; 5-171; 5-175; 5-176; 5-192; 5-215; 5-216; 5-217;
5-235; 5-236; 5-238; 5-475T; 5-476T; 5-477T.
Refer to FM 21-6 for explanation of distribution formula.
By order of the Secretary of War:
G. C. MARSHALL
Chief of Staff
Official:
J. A. ULIO
Major General
The Adjutant General
Distribution:
AAF (Cml O) (10); AGF (Cml O) (10); ASF (2); T of Opn
(Cml O) (10); Arm & Sv Bds (1); Def Comd (2); S Div
ASF (1); Tech Sv (2) except CWS (45); SvC (Cml O) (4);
PE (Attn: Cml O) (2); Sub-PE (Cml O) (2); PG (2); Ars 3
(2); ASF Dep (CW Sec) (2); ASF Dep (2); Dep 3 (2); Pro
Dist 3 (2); Tech Sv C (2); USMA (20); Tng C (2); A (2);
CHQ (5); B (1); R (5); Bn 2 (2), 3 (5), 7, 17 (2); C 2 (2), 3
(5), 7, 17 (2); AF (2); W (Cml O) (1); Five (5) copies to
each of the following: T/O & E 5-15; 5-16; 5-17; 5-35; 5-
36; 5-37; 5-171; 5-175; 5-176; 5-192; 5-215; 5-216; 5-217;
5-235; 5-236; 5-238; 5-475T; 5-476T; 5-477T.
Refer to FM 21-6 for explanation of distribution formula.
Page 28
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART ONE
INTRODUCTION
Paragraph Page
SECTION I. GENERAL
Scope 1 1
Records 2 1
SECTION II. DESCRIPTION AND DATA
Uses of flame throwers 3 1
Characteristics and employment 4 4
Description and functioning 5 6
Identification information 6 9
Differences in models 7 9
Interchanging parts with M1 or M1A1
flame thrower 8 9
Data 9 9
SECTION III. TOOLS, PARTS, AND ACCESSORIES
Items with each flame thrower 10 11
PART TWO
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION IV. GENERAL
Scope 11 14
SECTION V. SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF
EQUIPMENT
New equipment 12 14
PART ONE
INTRODUCTION
Paragraph Page
SECTION I. GENERAL
Scope 1 1
Records 2 1
SECTION II. DESCRIPTION AND DATA
Uses of flame throwers 3 1
Characteristics and employment 4 4
Description and functioning 5 6
Identification information 6 9
Differences in models 7 9
Interchanging parts with M1 or M1A1
flame thrower 8 9
Data 9 9
SECTION III. TOOLS, PARTS, AND ACCESSORIES
Items with each flame thrower 10 11
PART TWO
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION IV. GENERAL
Scope 11 14
SECTION V. SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF
EQUIPMENT
New equipment 12 14
Page 29
Used equipment 13 15
SECTION VI. CONTROLS
Controls 14 15
SECTION VII. OPERATION UNDER USUAL
CONDITIONS
Training 15 16
Charging, filling, and servicing 16 16
Connecting tank group and gun group 17 16
Loading with ignition cylinder 18 17
Carrying the tank group 19 21
Carrying the gun 20 21
Opening pressure-tank valve 21 22
Ranges 22 22
Wind deflection 23 22
Firing positions 24 23
Aiming 25 23
Firing 26 23
Ceasing or interrupting fire 27 26
Additional bursts 28 26
Soaking the target 29 26
After firing 30 26
SECTION VIII. AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Ignition cylinder 31 27
Charging pressure tank 32 28
Precautions when pressure-charging 33 32
Characteristics of fuels 34 33
Preparation of thickened fuels 35 34
Preparation of liquid fuels 36 38
Filling by pouring 37 39
Filling by force pump 38 40
Filling by blowing 39 40
Precautions with fuels 40 43
SECTION VI. CONTROLS
Controls 14 15
SECTION VII. OPERATION UNDER USUAL
CONDITIONS
Training 15 16
Charging, filling, and servicing 16 16
Connecting tank group and gun group 17 16
Loading with ignition cylinder 18 17
Carrying the tank group 19 21
Carrying the gun 20 21
Opening pressure-tank valve 21 22
Ranges 22 22
Wind deflection 23 22
Firing positions 24 23
Aiming 25 23
Firing 26 23
Ceasing or interrupting fire 27 26
Additional bursts 28 26
Soaking the target 29 26
After firing 30 26
SECTION VIII. AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Ignition cylinder 31 27
Charging pressure tank 32 28
Precautions when pressure-charging 33 32
Characteristics of fuels 34 33
Preparation of thickened fuels 35 34
Preparation of liquid fuels 36 38
Filling by pouring 37 39
Filling by force pump 38 40
Filling by blowing 39 40
Precautions with fuels 40 43
Page 30
SECTION IX. OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL
CONDITIONS
Wet conditions 41 44
Dust and mud 42 44
Heat 43 44
Cold 44 45
Wind 45 45
SECTION X. DEMOLITION TO PREVENT ENEMY
USE
Destruction procedure 46 45
PART THREE
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION XI. GENERAL
Scope 47 46
SECTION XII. SPECIAL ORGANIZATIONAL TOOLS
AND EQUIPMENT
Service kit 48 46
SECTION XIII. LUBRICATION
Lubrication 49 49
SECTION XIV. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
SERVICES
General 50 49
Before-operation service of tank group 51 50
Before-operation service of gun group 52 50
Service when filling and charging 53 52
Service when firing 54 53
Service after firing 55 53
Service after six firing missions 56 54
CONDITIONS
Wet conditions 41 44
Dust and mud 42 44
Heat 43 44
Cold 44 45
Wind 45 45
SECTION X. DEMOLITION TO PREVENT ENEMY
USE
Destruction procedure 46 45
PART THREE
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION XI. GENERAL
Scope 47 46
SECTION XII. SPECIAL ORGANIZATIONAL TOOLS
AND EQUIPMENT
Service kit 48 46
SECTION XIII. LUBRICATION
Lubrication 49 49
SECTION XIV. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
SERVICES
General 50 49
Before-operation service of tank group 51 50
Before-operation service of gun group 52 50
Service when filling and charging 53 52
Service when firing 54 53
Service after firing 55 53
Service after six firing missions 56 54
Page 31
SECTION XV. TROUBLE SHOOTING
Precautions 57 55
Fuel leaks 58 55
Safety head “blows” (breaks) 59 56
Carrier uncomfortable 60 56
Short range 61 56
Fuel-valve failure 62 57
Failure of ignition cylinder to ignite 63 57
Failure of fuel to ignite 64 58
SECTION XVI. TANK GROUP
General 65 58
Pressure tank and valve assembly 66 59
Pressure regulator 67 63
Fuel-tank assembly 68 65
Filling and safety-head plug assemblies 69 67
Tank coupling 70 69
Carrier 71 71
SECTION XVII. GUN GROUP
General 72 74
Fuel-hose assembly 73 74
Valve grip 74 75
Barrel and valve-body assembly 75 77
Ignition head 76 82
APPENDIX
SECTION XVIII. SHIPMENT AND STORAGE
Shipment and storage 77 86
SECTION XIX. LIST OF REFERENCES
References 78 87
INDEX
Precautions 57 55
Fuel leaks 58 55
Safety head “blows” (breaks) 59 56
Carrier uncomfortable 60 56
Short range 61 56
Fuel-valve failure 62 57
Failure of ignition cylinder to ignite 63 57
Failure of fuel to ignite 64 58
SECTION XVI. TANK GROUP
General 65 58
Pressure tank and valve assembly 66 59
Pressure regulator 67 63
Fuel-tank assembly 68 65
Filling and safety-head plug assemblies 69 67
Tank coupling 70 69
Carrier 71 71
SECTION XVII. GUN GROUP
General 72 74
Fuel-hose assembly 73 74
Valve grip 74 75
Barrel and valve-body assembly 75 77
Ignition head 76 82
APPENDIX
SECTION XVIII. SHIPMENT AND STORAGE
Shipment and storage 77 86
SECTION XIX. LIST OF REFERENCES
References 78 87
INDEX
Page 32
Page 33
Fig 1. Portable flame thrower M2-2.
Page 34
PART ONE
INTRODUCTION
Section I GENERAL
1. SCOPE.
a. Arrangement. This manual is published to guide and inform personnel
using and maintaining flame thrower, portable, M2-2. Part One contains
general information; Part Two is a guide to operation; Part Three gives
maintenance procedures. The Appendix discusses shipment and storage
procedures, and applicable publications.
b. References. References are listed in the Appendix. The list includes
field manuals, technical manuals, and Army Regulations.
2. RECORDS.
Although no standard maintenance forms and records are furnished, an
improvised list should be kept of the number of times each flame thrower
has been fired. The list indicates when it is necessary to provide the after-
six-missions preventive maintenance and lubrication. It should be tacked or
glued to the inside surface of the packing-chest lid and each flame thrower
should always be returned to its own chest.
INTRODUCTION
Section I GENERAL
1. SCOPE.
a. Arrangement. This manual is published to guide and inform personnel
using and maintaining flame thrower, portable, M2-2. Part One contains
general information; Part Two is a guide to operation; Part Three gives
maintenance procedures. The Appendix discusses shipment and storage
procedures, and applicable publications.
b. References. References are listed in the Appendix. The list includes
field manuals, technical manuals, and Army Regulations.
2. RECORDS.
Although no standard maintenance forms and records are furnished, an
improvised list should be kept of the number of times each flame thrower
has been fired. The list indicates when it is necessary to provide the after-
six-missions preventive maintenance and lubrication. It should be tacked or
glued to the inside surface of the packing-chest lid and each flame thrower
should always be returned to its own chest.
Page 35
Section II DESCRIPTION AND DATA
3. USES OF FLAME THROWERS.
Flame throwers can: a. Penetrate openings, such as embrasures and gun
ports, and fill the fortifications with flame and smoke.
b. Burn, asphyxiate, and blind enemy personnel, causing casualties,
shock, panic, and abandonment of a fortified position.
c. Ignite combustible parts of shelters and materiel and start detonation of
sensitive ammunition and explosives.
Fig 2. Firing with liquid fuel.
3. USES OF FLAME THROWERS.
Flame throwers can: a. Penetrate openings, such as embrasures and gun
ports, and fill the fortifications with flame and smoke.
b. Burn, asphyxiate, and blind enemy personnel, causing casualties,
shock, panic, and abandonment of a fortified position.
c. Ignite combustible parts of shelters and materiel and start detonation of
sensitive ammunition and explosives.
Fig 2. Firing with liquid fuel.
Page 36
Fig 3. Firing with thickened fuel. Thickened fuel has longer range than
liquid fuel and burns on target for several minutes.
d. “Shoot around corners,” when fuel is fired from dead or blind angles.
This is made possible by the billowing and swirling movements of flaming
gases. Blazing thickened fuels also ricochet from wall to wall in
fortifications.
e. Cause the enemy to close ports, temporarily putting the emplacement
out of action and thus protecting the demolition party.
f. Mop up dug-in personnel.
g. Eliminate enemy nests in street or jungle fighting.
4. CHARACTERISTICS AND EMPLOYMENT.
a. Action. Fuel is propelled into the target by a charge of highly
compressed air or nitrogen. As fuel leaves the gun of the M2-2 portable
flame thrower (Fig 1), it is ignited by contact with flame from charges of
incendiary mix held in an expendable ignition cylinder.
b. Bursts. A continuous stream or separate bursts may be fired for
approximately 8 to 9 seconds, not including time between the bursts. The
liquid fuel and burns on target for several minutes.
d. “Shoot around corners,” when fuel is fired from dead or blind angles.
This is made possible by the billowing and swirling movements of flaming
gases. Blazing thickened fuels also ricochet from wall to wall in
fortifications.
e. Cause the enemy to close ports, temporarily putting the emplacement
out of action and thus protecting the demolition party.
f. Mop up dug-in personnel.
g. Eliminate enemy nests in street or jungle fighting.
4. CHARACTERISTICS AND EMPLOYMENT.
a. Action. Fuel is propelled into the target by a charge of highly
compressed air or nitrogen. As fuel leaves the gun of the M2-2 portable
flame thrower (Fig 1), it is ignited by contact with flame from charges of
incendiary mix held in an expendable ignition cylinder.
b. Bursts. A continuous stream or separate bursts may be fired for
approximately 8 to 9 seconds, not including time between the bursts. The
Page 37
five incendiary charges in the ignition cylinder are controlled by the trigger
and can ignite several bursts.
c. Range. Portable flame throwers are fired at extremely close or point-
blank range for best results. (Par 22) Effective range for liquid fuels (Fig 2)
is as far as 20 yards, and for thickened fuels (Fig 3), 40 yards, but
underbrush and adverse winds can reduce the distances.
d. Weight. To keep the weight as light as possible and still provide
strength to withstand very high pressures, most parts are made of aluminum
or sheet steel.
e. Tactics. Two or more flame throwers are generally used on a mission
with other weapons of the assault squad. (See FM 31-50, “Attack on a
Fortified Position and Combat in Towns.”)
f. Firers and assistants. One man carries and fires each flame thrower.
Well-armed assistants accompany firers to give close protection and to
serve as emergency replacements. Whereas the M1A1 portable flame
thrower may require the help of an assistant to open the pressure-tank valve,
the M2-2 flame thrower pressure-tank valve is located within reach of the
firer and is operated by him without assistance. Firers and assistants should
be thoroughly trained in operation of the weapon.
and can ignite several bursts.
c. Range. Portable flame throwers are fired at extremely close or point-
blank range for best results. (Par 22) Effective range for liquid fuels (Fig 2)
is as far as 20 yards, and for thickened fuels (Fig 3), 40 yards, but
underbrush and adverse winds can reduce the distances.
d. Weight. To keep the weight as light as possible and still provide
strength to withstand very high pressures, most parts are made of aluminum
or sheet steel.
e. Tactics. Two or more flame throwers are generally used on a mission
with other weapons of the assault squad. (See FM 31-50, “Attack on a
Fortified Position and Combat in Towns.”)
f. Firers and assistants. One man carries and fires each flame thrower.
Well-armed assistants accompany firers to give close protection and to
serve as emergency replacements. Whereas the M1A1 portable flame
thrower may require the help of an assistant to open the pressure-tank valve,
the M2-2 flame thrower pressure-tank valve is located within reach of the
firer and is operated by him without assistance. Firers and assistants should
be thoroughly trained in operation of the weapon.
Page 38
Fig 4. Tank group.
g. Charging and filling. In order to replace pressure tanks (cylinders) of
earlier types of flame throwers, it is necessary to unscrew and screw
threaded connections. Experience has shown that this frequently resulted in
damage to threads, leakage, loss of pressure, and loss of range. It is also
necessary to use tools to replace each pressure tank (cylinder). The design
of the M2-2 flame thrower eliminates these difficulties. The tank group (Fig
4) may be charged and filled as a unit with or without gun and hose. The
quick-connecting tank coupling permits rapid interchanging of empty and
g. Charging and filling. In order to replace pressure tanks (cylinders) of
earlier types of flame throwers, it is necessary to unscrew and screw
threaded connections. Experience has shown that this frequently resulted in
damage to threads, leakage, loss of pressure, and loss of range. It is also
necessary to use tools to replace each pressure tank (cylinder). The design
of the M2-2 flame thrower eliminates these difficulties. The tank group (Fig
4) may be charged and filled as a unit with or without gun and hose. The
quick-connecting tank coupling permits rapid interchanging of empty and
Page 39
full tank groups by the firers or assistants. This is done without tools, takes
very little time, and cannot cause leakage, loss of pressure, and loss of
range due to damaged threads.
5. DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTIONING.
The flame thrower consists of two major groups: tank group and gun group.
Detailed descriptions of assemblies and parts are included in Paragraphs 66
through 76.
a. Tank group. (Figs 4 and 5) Carried upon the firer’s back, the tank
group holds fuel and pressure. The tank group may be identified as tank,
fuel, portable flame thrower, M2, assembly D81-1-482. It consists
principally of:
(1) Two fuel tanks, holding a total of 4 gallons of fuel, and joined by a
tank connector to form a single fuel reservoir.
(2) Pressure tank, charged with highly compressed air or nitrogen used
to propel fuel from the fuel tanks through the gun to the target. The tank is
large in capacity to assure ample pressure and uniformly long range
throughout the firing.
(3) Pressure-tank valve, which releases air or nitrogen through the
pressure regulator to the fuel tanks. The valve can be opened by the firer
without the assistance required in the case of the M1A1 flame thrower.
(4) Pressure regulator, which automatically assures delivery of air or
nitrogen to the fuel tanks at the proper pressure. The regulator is located in
a position where it cannot easily be damaged.
(5) Carrier, which supports the tank group on the firer’s back and
shoulders and secures it to his body. It includes body and shoulder straps
and quick-releasing fasteners.
b. Gun group. (Fig 6) Carried, aimed, and operated by the hands of the
firer, the gun group ignites the fuel and directs the flame into the target. It
includes:
(1) Fuel hose, which conveys fuel from the tank group to the gun. The
fuel hose may be requisitioned as hose, fuel, portable flame thrower, M1,
assembly B81-1-498.
very little time, and cannot cause leakage, loss of pressure, and loss of
range due to damaged threads.
5. DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTIONING.
The flame thrower consists of two major groups: tank group and gun group.
Detailed descriptions of assemblies and parts are included in Paragraphs 66
through 76.
a. Tank group. (Figs 4 and 5) Carried upon the firer’s back, the tank
group holds fuel and pressure. The tank group may be identified as tank,
fuel, portable flame thrower, M2, assembly D81-1-482. It consists
principally of:
(1) Two fuel tanks, holding a total of 4 gallons of fuel, and joined by a
tank connector to form a single fuel reservoir.
(2) Pressure tank, charged with highly compressed air or nitrogen used
to propel fuel from the fuel tanks through the gun to the target. The tank is
large in capacity to assure ample pressure and uniformly long range
throughout the firing.
(3) Pressure-tank valve, which releases air or nitrogen through the
pressure regulator to the fuel tanks. The valve can be opened by the firer
without the assistance required in the case of the M1A1 flame thrower.
(4) Pressure regulator, which automatically assures delivery of air or
nitrogen to the fuel tanks at the proper pressure. The regulator is located in
a position where it cannot easily be damaged.
(5) Carrier, which supports the tank group on the firer’s back and
shoulders and secures it to his body. It includes body and shoulder straps
and quick-releasing fasteners.
b. Gun group. (Fig 6) Carried, aimed, and operated by the hands of the
firer, the gun group ignites the fuel and directs the flame into the target. It
includes:
(1) Fuel hose, which conveys fuel from the tank group to the gun. The
fuel hose may be requisitioned as hose, fuel, portable flame thrower, M1,
assembly B81-1-498.
Page 40
(2) Gun, which ignites the fuel and directs it to the target. The gun may
be identified as gun, portable flame thrower, M2, assembly D81-1-405. It
consists of:
(a) Fuel valve, which discharges fuel through the barrel. The valve
is operated by squeezing the valve lever and the grip safety, which are on
opposite sides of the valve grip. The valve also includes a barrel from which
the fuel is ejected. The ignition head is supported on the front of the barrel.
(b) Ignition head, which ignites the fuel as it passes from the nozzle
of the barrel. With each pull of the trigger on the front grip, one of five
charges of incendiary mix in an ignition cylinder is ignited. This pilot flame
ignites the fuel as it is propelled from the gun.
be identified as gun, portable flame thrower, M2, assembly D81-1-405. It
consists of:
(a) Fuel valve, which discharges fuel through the barrel. The valve
is operated by squeezing the valve lever and the grip safety, which are on
opposite sides of the valve grip. The valve also includes a barrel from which
the fuel is ejected. The ignition head is supported on the front of the barrel.
(b) Ignition head, which ignites the fuel as it passes from the nozzle
of the barrel. With each pull of the trigger on the front grip, one of five
charges of incendiary mix in an ignition cylinder is ignited. This pilot flame
ignites the fuel as it is propelled from the gun.
Page 41
Fig 5. Tank group with carrier folded back to show construction.
Page 42
Fig 6. Gun group of portable flame thrower M2-2.
6. IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION.
The words “Chemical Warfare Service,” model numbers, serial numbers, lot
numbers, weight, cubage, manufacturers’ names, contract number, and date
of packing are indicated on the packing chest or the equipment. The
numbers and letters shown on the equipment should be referred to when
repairs are required. The tank group and the gun (without the fuel hose)
may each be marked “M2” and the fuel hose may be marked “M1,”
although all of these are components of the M2-2 portable flame thrower.
7. DIFFERENCES IN MODELS.
a. M2-2 and E3 portable flame throwers. Portable flame thrower M2-2 is
identical in all important respects with portable flame thrower E3. (The E3
flame thrower, when standardized with some modifications, became the
M2-2.) Operation and maintenance of the M2-2 and E3 are in general the
same, and the parts are interchangeable.
b. M2-2, M1, and M1A1 portable flame throwers. Portable flame thrower
M2-2 has the same fuel capacity but differs in construction from portable
flame throwers M1 and M1A1. Parts are not interchangeable except as
stated in Paragraph 8.
8. INTERCHANGING PARTS WITH M1 OR M1A1 FLAME THROWER.
6. IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION.
The words “Chemical Warfare Service,” model numbers, serial numbers, lot
numbers, weight, cubage, manufacturers’ names, contract number, and date
of packing are indicated on the packing chest or the equipment. The
numbers and letters shown on the equipment should be referred to when
repairs are required. The tank group and the gun (without the fuel hose)
may each be marked “M2” and the fuel hose may be marked “M1,”
although all of these are components of the M2-2 portable flame thrower.
7. DIFFERENCES IN MODELS.
a. M2-2 and E3 portable flame throwers. Portable flame thrower M2-2 is
identical in all important respects with portable flame thrower E3. (The E3
flame thrower, when standardized with some modifications, became the
M2-2.) Operation and maintenance of the M2-2 and E3 are in general the
same, and the parts are interchangeable.
b. M2-2, M1, and M1A1 portable flame throwers. Portable flame thrower
M2-2 has the same fuel capacity but differs in construction from portable
flame throwers M1 and M1A1. Parts are not interchangeable except as
stated in Paragraph 8.
8. INTERCHANGING PARTS WITH M1 OR M1A1 FLAME THROWER.
Page 43
To use an M2-2 gun with tank group (fuel unit) of an M1 or M1A1 portable
flame thrower:
a. Remove fuel hose from M2-2 gun.
b. Screw a 3/4-inch by 1/2-inch pipe bushing into the side opening of the
fuel-valve body. This bushing is furnished in the spare parts kit of each M2-
2 portable flame thrower. (Par 10)
c. Screw the fuel-hose assembly of the M1 or M1A1 flame thrower into
the 1/2-inch opening of the bushing, using a wrench to make a tight
connection.
9. DATA.
All data are approximate.
a. Range. See Paragraph 22.
b. Duration of fire.
(1) Fuel.
(a) Continuous discharge of approximately 8 to 9 seconds, or
(b) Several short bursts totalling approximately 8 to 9 seconds (not
including time between bursts).
(2) Ignition cylinder. Five charges in each cylinder, 8 to 12 seconds per
charge.
c. Weights.
Pounds
Portable flame thrower M2-2, empty, in shipping
110
chest (including the chest and all contents)
Portable flame thrower M2-2, empty 43
Portable flame thrower M2-2, filled with fuel 68 to 72
Tank group, empty 35
Tank group, filled with fuel 60 to 64
Gun group 8
d. Dimensions.
flame thrower:
a. Remove fuel hose from M2-2 gun.
b. Screw a 3/4-inch by 1/2-inch pipe bushing into the side opening of the
fuel-valve body. This bushing is furnished in the spare parts kit of each M2-
2 portable flame thrower. (Par 10)
c. Screw the fuel-hose assembly of the M1 or M1A1 flame thrower into
the 1/2-inch opening of the bushing, using a wrench to make a tight
connection.
9. DATA.
All data are approximate.
a. Range. See Paragraph 22.
b. Duration of fire.
(1) Fuel.
(a) Continuous discharge of approximately 8 to 9 seconds, or
(b) Several short bursts totalling approximately 8 to 9 seconds (not
including time between bursts).
(2) Ignition cylinder. Five charges in each cylinder, 8 to 12 seconds per
charge.
c. Weights.
Pounds
Portable flame thrower M2-2, empty, in shipping
110
chest (including the chest and all contents)
Portable flame thrower M2-2, empty 43
Portable flame thrower M2-2, filled with fuel 68 to 72
Tank group, empty 35
Tank group, filled with fuel 60 to 64
Gun group 8
d. Dimensions.
Page 44
Inches
Gun, length 30
Fuel hose, length 37
Tank group, height 27
Tank group, width 20
Tank group, breadth 11
Packing chest 34 x 23 x 19
(Cube of packing chest: 8-1/2 cubic feet)
e. Capacity of weapon.
Ignition cylinder (M1 or E1) 1 (which includes 5
incendiary charges)
Fuel 4 gallons plus void for air
or nitrogen
f. Pressures.
Pounds per sq. in.
Pressure tank 1,700 to 2,100
Fuel tanks 350
g. Ratio of expended supplies. For every 100 complete fillings of the
flame thrower, the following supplies are normally expended:
(1) Nitrogen contained in fifteen 220-cubic-foot cylinders or an
equivalent volume of compressed air. (Eleven cylinders are expended if the
four-place arrangement described in Paragraph 32 is used.)
(2) 450 gallons of fuel (400 gallons plus 50 gallons for spillage,
spoilage, and evaporation).
(3) 100 ignition cylinders.
(4) If thickened fuel is used, 135 pounds (in cans of 5-1/4 pounds
each) of U. S. Army fuel thickener.
Gun, length 30
Fuel hose, length 37
Tank group, height 27
Tank group, width 20
Tank group, breadth 11
Packing chest 34 x 23 x 19
(Cube of packing chest: 8-1/2 cubic feet)
e. Capacity of weapon.
Ignition cylinder (M1 or E1) 1 (which includes 5
incendiary charges)
Fuel 4 gallons plus void for air
or nitrogen
f. Pressures.
Pounds per sq. in.
Pressure tank 1,700 to 2,100
Fuel tanks 350
g. Ratio of expended supplies. For every 100 complete fillings of the
flame thrower, the following supplies are normally expended:
(1) Nitrogen contained in fifteen 220-cubic-foot cylinders or an
equivalent volume of compressed air. (Eleven cylinders are expended if the
four-place arrangement described in Paragraph 32 is used.)
(2) 450 gallons of fuel (400 gallons plus 50 gallons for spillage,
spoilage, and evaporation).
(3) 100 ignition cylinders.
(4) If thickened fuel is used, 135 pounds (in cans of 5-1/4 pounds
each) of U. S. Army fuel thickener.
Page 45
Section III TOOLS, PARTS, AND
ACCESSORIES
10. ITEMS WITH EACH FLAME THROWER.
The items listed below or their equivalents (Fig 7) are included in each M2-
2 flame-thrower packing chest, in addition to the flame thrower. Numbers
listed with items are Chemical Warfare Service stock numbers.
a. Kit, tool, for portable flame thrower M2-2, assembly B81-6-50.
b. Kit, spare parts, for portable flame thrower M2-2, assembly B81-6-52.
c. Cylinder, ignition, portable flame thrower M1. (6 cylinders, in 3 cans
containing 2 each)
d. Technical Manual 3-376A, “Portable Flame Thrower M2-2.”
e. Gun mounting board. (Fig 10)
f. Plug, coupling, E81-1-514 (for use in tank coupling when filling tank
group with gun detached).
ACCESSORIES
10. ITEMS WITH EACH FLAME THROWER.
The items listed below or their equivalents (Fig 7) are included in each M2-
2 flame-thrower packing chest, in addition to the flame thrower. Numbers
listed with items are Chemical Warfare Service stock numbers.
a. Kit, tool, for portable flame thrower M2-2, assembly B81-6-50.
b. Kit, spare parts, for portable flame thrower M2-2, assembly B81-6-52.
c. Cylinder, ignition, portable flame thrower M1. (6 cylinders, in 3 cans
containing 2 each)
d. Technical Manual 3-376A, “Portable Flame Thrower M2-2.”
e. Gun mounting board. (Fig 10)
f. Plug, coupling, E81-1-514 (for use in tank coupling when filling tank
group with gun detached).
Page 46
Fig 7. Items packed in chest with each flame thrower: A—Spare parts kit;
B—Packing list; C—Three cans of ignition cylinders; D—Tool kit; E—
Coupling plug; F—TM 3-376A, “Portable Flame Thrower M2-2.”
Fig 8. Contents of tool kit:
A. 1 Screw driver, cabinet, 4-1/2-inch blade length, 3/16-inch blade
diameter, H22-50-13.
B. 1 Wrench, hex, 1/8-inch across flats for 1/4-inch socket-head set
screws, H22-49-12.
B—Packing list; C—Three cans of ignition cylinders; D—Tool kit; E—
Coupling plug; F—TM 3-376A, “Portable Flame Thrower M2-2.”
Fig 8. Contents of tool kit:
A. 1 Screw driver, cabinet, 4-1/2-inch blade length, 3/16-inch blade
diameter, H22-50-13.
B. 1 Wrench, hex, 1/8-inch across flats for 1/4-inch socket-head set
screws, H22-49-12.
Page 47
C. 1 Wrench, engineers’, double head, 3/4-inch and 7/8-inch openings,
9 inches approx length, H22-49-115.
D. 1 Screw driver, common, 6-inch blade length, 5/16-inch blade
diameter, H22-50-6.
E. 1 Wrench, valve-adjusting, assembly, A81-6-48.
F. 1 Wrench, heavy “S”, 1-3/8-inch and 1-1/2-inch openings, 12 inches
approx length, H22-49-113.
G. 1 Wrench, engineers’, single head, 1-1/8 inch opening, 10-1/2
inches approx length, H22-49-31.
H. 1 Wrench, adjustable, single end, 6 inches approx length (crescent
type), H22-49-67.
I. 1 Wrench, heavy “S”, 1-3/8-inch and 1-3/4-inch openings, 12 inches
approx length, A81-6-49.
Fig 9. Contents of spare parts kit:
A. 1 Diaphragm, valve, assembly, A81-1-416.
9 inches approx length, H22-49-115.
D. 1 Screw driver, common, 6-inch blade length, 5/16-inch blade
diameter, H22-50-6.
E. 1 Wrench, valve-adjusting, assembly, A81-6-48.
F. 1 Wrench, heavy “S”, 1-3/8-inch and 1-1/2-inch openings, 12 inches
approx length, H22-49-113.
G. 1 Wrench, engineers’, single head, 1-1/8 inch opening, 10-1/2
inches approx length, H22-49-31.
H. 1 Wrench, adjustable, single end, 6 inches approx length (crescent
type), H22-49-67.
I. 1 Wrench, heavy “S”, 1-3/8-inch and 1-3/4-inch openings, 12 inches
approx length, A81-6-49.
Fig 9. Contents of spare parts kit:
A. 1 Diaphragm, valve, assembly, A81-1-416.
Page 48
B. 1 Case, spring, assembly, B81-1-444.
C. 1 Bushing, pipe, head, 3/4-inch by 1/2-inch (galvanized iron), H98-
5-93.
D. 2 Washers, coupling, A81-1-513.
E. 3 Heads, safety, R81-1-561.
Fig 10. Packing chest open, with gun on mounting board. Tool kit, spare
parts kit, and cans of ignition cylinders in boxes at right.
C. 1 Bushing, pipe, head, 3/4-inch by 1/2-inch (galvanized iron), H98-
5-93.
D. 2 Washers, coupling, A81-1-513.
E. 3 Heads, safety, R81-1-561.
Fig 10. Packing chest open, with gun on mounting board. Tool kit, spare
parts kit, and cans of ignition cylinders in boxes at right.
Page 49
PART TWO
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Section IV GENERAL
11. SCOPE.
Part Two of this manual is for the guidance of operating personnel. It
includes information on the controls and on operation.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Section IV GENERAL
11. SCOPE.
Part Two of this manual is for the guidance of operating personnel. It
includes information on the controls and on operation.
Page 50
Section V SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF
EQUIPMENT
12. NEW EQUIPMENT.
Upon receipt of a new flame thrower, the following procedure should be
carried out:
a. Cut packing-chest steel straps and seals with pliers.
b. Remove the screws, if present, from top of chest.
c. Open two latches at front of chest.
d. Lift lid backward and connect chain from inside of chest to inside of
lid.
e. Remove moistureproof paper.
f. Remove gun from carton. After removing waterproofing tape from
ends of hose, connect hose and gun. (Par 17)
g. Remove mounting board and place gun with hose on the board as
shown in Figure 10.
EQUIPMENT
12. NEW EQUIPMENT.
Upon receipt of a new flame thrower, the following procedure should be
carried out:
a. Cut packing-chest steel straps and seals with pliers.
b. Remove the screws, if present, from top of chest.
c. Open two latches at front of chest.
d. Lift lid backward and connect chain from inside of chest to inside of
lid.
e. Remove moistureproof paper.
f. Remove gun from carton. After removing waterproofing tape from
ends of hose, connect hose and gun. (Par 17)
g. Remove mounting board and place gun with hose on the board as
shown in Figure 10.
Page 51
Fig 11. Screwing deflector tube in safety head on left fuel tank.
Fig 12. Controls for operation of portable flame thrower M2-2.
h. Remove spare parts kit, tool kit, cans of ignition cylinders, and other
items from packing chest.
Fig 12. Controls for operation of portable flame thrower M2-2.
h. Remove spare parts kit, tool kit, cans of ignition cylinders, and other
items from packing chest.
Page 52
i. Compare contents with packing list found in or on packing chest.
Inspect all contents carefully for completeness, correct adjustment, and
good condition.
j. Insert deflector tube in safety head on left fuel tank. (Fig 11) Outlet
should face to rear and at a 45-degree angle to operator’s left shoulder. (Fig
18) Screw in deflector tube by hand; do not use wrench on deflector tube.
Tighten lock nut with wrench.
k. Before use on a mission, test-fire the weapon. (Par 56 b)
l. Save the packing chest for storage of the equipment when flame
thrower is not being carried on a firing mission or serviced.
13. USED EQUIPMENT.
When they apply, the same steps should be taken as in Paragraph 12. Any
worn or damaged parts should be replaced. Areas where paint has worn off
should be touched up with fresh paint.
Inspect all contents carefully for completeness, correct adjustment, and
good condition.
j. Insert deflector tube in safety head on left fuel tank. (Fig 11) Outlet
should face to rear and at a 45-degree angle to operator’s left shoulder. (Fig
18) Screw in deflector tube by hand; do not use wrench on deflector tube.
Tighten lock nut with wrench.
k. Before use on a mission, test-fire the weapon. (Par 56 b)
l. Save the packing chest for storage of the equipment when flame
thrower is not being carried on a firing mission or serviced.
13. USED EQUIPMENT.
When they apply, the same steps should be taken as in Paragraph 12. Any
worn or damaged parts should be replaced. Areas where paint has worn off
should be touched up with fresh paint.
Page 53
Section VI CONTROLS
14. CONTROLS.
The firer uses the pressure-tank valve handle, the trigger, and the valve
lever and grip safety (Fig 12) in succession as follows:
a. Valve handle. The pressure-tank valve is operated by turning a handle
on the valve flexible shaft within reach of the firer. Counterclockwise
operation of handle releases pressure to the fuel tanks. Clockwise turning
closes the valve.
b. Trigger. The trigger is at the front grip of the gun. Pulling the trigger
vigorously ignites an incendiary charge in the ignition cylinder. This in turn
ignites the fuel as it leaves the gun. The trigger action also causes the
ignition cylinder to revolve one-fifth of a turn, presenting another charge for
firing. Each of the five charges may thus be used in rapid succession, if
necessary, by pulling the trigger vigorously as many as five times.
c. Valve lever and grip safety. The valve lever and grip safety are
mounted on opposite sides of the valve grip of the gun. When both controls
are compressed, fuel is propelled from the gun. If either the valve lever or
the grip safety is not compressed, the fuel valve remains closed and the fuel
remains in the weapon.
14. CONTROLS.
The firer uses the pressure-tank valve handle, the trigger, and the valve
lever and grip safety (Fig 12) in succession as follows:
a. Valve handle. The pressure-tank valve is operated by turning a handle
on the valve flexible shaft within reach of the firer. Counterclockwise
operation of handle releases pressure to the fuel tanks. Clockwise turning
closes the valve.
b. Trigger. The trigger is at the front grip of the gun. Pulling the trigger
vigorously ignites an incendiary charge in the ignition cylinder. This in turn
ignites the fuel as it leaves the gun. The trigger action also causes the
ignition cylinder to revolve one-fifth of a turn, presenting another charge for
firing. Each of the five charges may thus be used in rapid succession, if
necessary, by pulling the trigger vigorously as many as five times.
c. Valve lever and grip safety. The valve lever and grip safety are
mounted on opposite sides of the valve grip of the gun. When both controls
are compressed, fuel is propelled from the gun. If either the valve lever or
the grip safety is not compressed, the fuel valve remains closed and the fuel
remains in the weapon.
Page 54
Section VII OPERATION UNDER USUAL
CONDITIONS
15. TRAINING.
Effective use of the M2-2 portable flame thrower can be achieved only by
diligent practice with the weapon. Untrained firers or assistants should
never be sent on a mission.
a. Practice. Firers should practice under varying conditions of wind,
range, elevation, depression, and traverse. The shortness of the total firing
time (approximately 8 to 9 seconds) demands split-second judgment and
coordination.
b. Use of water in training. Water may be used (instead of fuel) for
elementary practice firing. Ignition cylinders are not used with water. The
water under pressure may cause serious injuries to personnel at 10 yards.
After practice with water, the gun should be disassembled (Pars 73 through
76), cleaned and dried piece by piece, and lubricated. (Par 49)
c. Use of fuel in training. When using fuel in training, select or prepare a
practice field of fire which provides at least 125 yards for range and 30
yards for spread. If the field contains dry grass, brush, or other flammable
material, a fire-fighting squad should be available with equipment and
source of water. Assistants and observers should stay well behind the firer
because of danger from wind shifts. See Paragraph 40 for additional
precautions.
16. CHARGING, FILLING, AND SERVICING.
Before use on missions or for training, flame throwers must be charged,
filled, and serviced. Charging with compressed air or compressed nitrogen
is described in Paragraphs 32 and 33; filling with fuel in Paragraphs 34
through 40; and servicing in Paragraphs 50 through 56. Test for pressure.
(Par 53 d)
17. CONNECTING TANK GROUP AND GUN GROUP.
CONDITIONS
15. TRAINING.
Effective use of the M2-2 portable flame thrower can be achieved only by
diligent practice with the weapon. Untrained firers or assistants should
never be sent on a mission.
a. Practice. Firers should practice under varying conditions of wind,
range, elevation, depression, and traverse. The shortness of the total firing
time (approximately 8 to 9 seconds) demands split-second judgment and
coordination.
b. Use of water in training. Water may be used (instead of fuel) for
elementary practice firing. Ignition cylinders are not used with water. The
water under pressure may cause serious injuries to personnel at 10 yards.
After practice with water, the gun should be disassembled (Pars 73 through
76), cleaned and dried piece by piece, and lubricated. (Par 49)
c. Use of fuel in training. When using fuel in training, select or prepare a
practice field of fire which provides at least 125 yards for range and 30
yards for spread. If the field contains dry grass, brush, or other flammable
material, a fire-fighting squad should be available with equipment and
source of water. Assistants and observers should stay well behind the firer
because of danger from wind shifts. See Paragraph 40 for additional
precautions.
16. CHARGING, FILLING, AND SERVICING.
Before use on missions or for training, flame throwers must be charged,
filled, and serviced. Charging with compressed air or compressed nitrogen
is described in Paragraphs 32 and 33; filling with fuel in Paragraphs 34
through 40; and servicing in Paragraphs 50 through 56. Test for pressure.
(Par 53 d)
17. CONNECTING TANK GROUP AND GUN GROUP.
Page 55
If a charged and filled tank group has been brought up to replace an emptied
one:
a. Place the new tank group on the ground with the tank coupling on top.
If the filling is thickened fuel, allow the tank group to rest in this position
for from 1 to 2 minutes.
b. Remove coupling plug from new tank group and disconnect gun group
from emptied tank group. Place unthreaded end of fuel hose in tank
coupling and lock in place. (Par 70)
c. Lock the coupling plug in the emptied tank group.
18. LOADING WITH IGNITION CYLINDER.
a. General. Just before the start of a mission, load an unused ignition
cylinder into the ignition head. (M1 and E1 ignition cylinders are identical
and may be used interchangeably.) Cylinders are packed two to a can. Do
not open cans until ready to load for a mission. The second cylinder in the
can should be used in another flame thrower on the same mission or as soon
as possible after opening the can. Partly used cylinders may be employed in
training.
b. Precautions. Care must be taken, whenever cylinders are handled, to
avoid any blows or pressure against the metal match ends. (Fig 13) Face,
hands, and other parts of the body should never be exposed to front of
cylinder or front of gun.
one:
a. Place the new tank group on the ground with the tank coupling on top.
If the filling is thickened fuel, allow the tank group to rest in this position
for from 1 to 2 minutes.
b. Remove coupling plug from new tank group and disconnect gun group
from emptied tank group. Place unthreaded end of fuel hose in tank
coupling and lock in place. (Par 70)
c. Lock the coupling plug in the emptied tank group.
18. LOADING WITH IGNITION CYLINDER.
a. General. Just before the start of a mission, load an unused ignition
cylinder into the ignition head. (M1 and E1 ignition cylinders are identical
and may be used interchangeably.) Cylinders are packed two to a can. Do
not open cans until ready to load for a mission. The second cylinder in the
can should be used in another flame thrower on the same mission or as soon
as possible after opening the can. Partly used cylinders may be employed in
training.
b. Precautions. Care must be taken, whenever cylinders are handled, to
avoid any blows or pressure against the metal match ends. (Fig 13) Face,
hands, and other parts of the body should never be exposed to front of
cylinder or front of gun.
Page 56
Fig 13. Ignition cylinder before use.
c. Procedure. Loading procedure is as follows:
(1) Unscrew and remove ignition shield. (Fig 14)
(2) Place ignition cylinder on end of barrel (Fig 15), being careful not
to grasp cylinder by its ends.
(3) Raise nozzle end of gun so cylinder slides down against the spring
case of the ignition head. (Fig 16) If necessary, rotate cylinder so it slips
down all the way. Do not force cylinder into place as forcing may
prematurely ignite it.
(4) Rotate spring case and ignition cylinder clockwise as far as they
turn freely.
c. Procedure. Loading procedure is as follows:
(1) Unscrew and remove ignition shield. (Fig 14)
(2) Place ignition cylinder on end of barrel (Fig 15), being careful not
to grasp cylinder by its ends.
(3) Raise nozzle end of gun so cylinder slides down against the spring
case of the ignition head. (Fig 16) If necessary, rotate cylinder so it slips
down all the way. Do not force cylinder into place as forcing may
prematurely ignite it.
(4) Rotate spring case and ignition cylinder clockwise as far as they
turn freely.
Page 57
(5) Place ignition shield over cylinder. Engage the slot in the shield on
the spring-case pin.
(6) Turn shield, screwing it onto ignition-head body. Make sure the
threads engage during the first turn of the shield. When the slot on the
shield engages the latch on the ignition head (Fig 17), the gun is loaded.
(7) If shield cannot be turned by hand tight enough to engage latch,
unscrew shield. Then turn shield backwards until threads engage and repeat
(6) above.
Fig 14. Unscrewing ignition shield, with pressure on latch.
the spring-case pin.
(6) Turn shield, screwing it onto ignition-head body. Make sure the
threads engage during the first turn of the shield. When the slot on the
shield engages the latch on the ignition head (Fig 17), the gun is loaded.
(7) If shield cannot be turned by hand tight enough to engage latch,
unscrew shield. Then turn shield backwards until threads engage and repeat
(6) above.
Fig 14. Unscrewing ignition shield, with pressure on latch.
Page 58
Fig 15. Placing ignition cylinder on gun. Care must be taken to avoid
striking or pushing metal matches of cylinder.
Fig 16. Ignition cylinder in place on gun before replacement of ignition
shield.
striking or pushing metal matches of cylinder.
Fig 16. Ignition cylinder in place on gun before replacement of ignition
shield.
Page 59
Fig 17. Ignition head assembled for firing of gun.
Page 60
Fig 18. Tank group adjusted on firer.
19. CARRYING THE TANK GROUP.
The tanks are supported on the firer’s back and secured to it by two
shoulder straps and two pairs of body straps. (Fig 18) The straps may be
adjusted by the buckles to fit the operator. The shoulder straps pass over the
shoulders and under the arm pits; the lower body straps are clasped tightly
in front of the body; and the upper body straps are clasped across the chest
to prevent the shoulder straps from slipping and the tank group from rolling
off the back. Adjustments to the various straps should be made until the unit
is carried with the bottom of the fuel tanks at the small of the operator’s
back. The tank group should fit snugly so that it does not shift if the
operator changes position quickly.
20. CARRYING THE GUN.
Fig 19. Carrying the gun, with hands in position to fire.
The procedure for carrying the gun is as follows:
19. CARRYING THE TANK GROUP.
The tanks are supported on the firer’s back and secured to it by two
shoulder straps and two pairs of body straps. (Fig 18) The straps may be
adjusted by the buckles to fit the operator. The shoulder straps pass over the
shoulders and under the arm pits; the lower body straps are clasped tightly
in front of the body; and the upper body straps are clasped across the chest
to prevent the shoulder straps from slipping and the tank group from rolling
off the back. Adjustments to the various straps should be made until the unit
is carried with the bottom of the fuel tanks at the small of the operator’s
back. The tank group should fit snugly so that it does not shift if the
operator changes position quickly.
20. CARRYING THE GUN.
Fig 19. Carrying the gun, with hands in position to fire.
The procedure for carrying the gun is as follows:
Page 61
a. Carry the gun with the hose at the right side. (Fig 19)
b. Grasp the valve grip with the right hand and the front grip with the left
hand, being careful not to operate the controls until ready to fire.
c. Keep the gun pointed away from friendly personnel at all times.
d. Do not face the front of the gun at any time. Even when no fuel is
being ejected, the incendiary charges of the ignition cylinder can cause
severe burns.
e. Keep the gun dry and clean if possible. Avoid getting dirt or foreign
matter into the weapon.
f. Avoid rough handling.
g. Wear gloves if available.
h. Carry any extra ignition cylinders only in metal containers.
21. OPENING PRESSURE-TANK VALVE.
The release of pressure into the fuel tank causes a hissing sound. Therefore,
open the pressure-tank valve while still out of hearing range of the enemy.
Do not, however, open it prematurely because of the possibility of pressure
leaks. To prevent frothing of the fuel, keep the tank group in as nearly an
upright position as possible when opening pressure-tank valve. Be sure to
turn the valve handle all the way in a counterclockwise direction. Stiffening
of the fuel hose occurs when the pressure-tank valve is opened.
22. RANGES.
Firers and assistants should learn to judge ranges by frequent practice under
varying conditions. The firers should be trained to approach as close as
practicable to the target and to fire if possible at point-blank range for the
greatest results.
a. Point-blank range.
(1) Effects. At very close (point-blank) range almost all of the burning
fuel can be fired at great velocity directly through ports and openings into
the target. Maximum casualties and damage are caused in the hostile
position.
b. Grasp the valve grip with the right hand and the front grip with the left
hand, being careful not to operate the controls until ready to fire.
c. Keep the gun pointed away from friendly personnel at all times.
d. Do not face the front of the gun at any time. Even when no fuel is
being ejected, the incendiary charges of the ignition cylinder can cause
severe burns.
e. Keep the gun dry and clean if possible. Avoid getting dirt or foreign
matter into the weapon.
f. Avoid rough handling.
g. Wear gloves if available.
h. Carry any extra ignition cylinders only in metal containers.
21. OPENING PRESSURE-TANK VALVE.
The release of pressure into the fuel tank causes a hissing sound. Therefore,
open the pressure-tank valve while still out of hearing range of the enemy.
Do not, however, open it prematurely because of the possibility of pressure
leaks. To prevent frothing of the fuel, keep the tank group in as nearly an
upright position as possible when opening pressure-tank valve. Be sure to
turn the valve handle all the way in a counterclockwise direction. Stiffening
of the fuel hose occurs when the pressure-tank valve is opened.
22. RANGES.
Firers and assistants should learn to judge ranges by frequent practice under
varying conditions. The firers should be trained to approach as close as
practicable to the target and to fire if possible at point-blank range for the
greatest results.
a. Point-blank range.
(1) Effects. At very close (point-blank) range almost all of the burning
fuel can be fired at great velocity directly through ports and openings into
the target. Maximum casualties and damage are caused in the hostile
position.
Page 62
(2) Protection. Common sense precautions are taken to prevent
casualties to friendly personnel from possible ricochet or rebounding of
flame. If the target includes a vertical wall at a right angle to the firer or
other friendly personnel, the weapon should not be fired at closer than 7 to
10 yards. When the weapon is fired at small openings in a bunker or
pillbox, the firer and other members of the assault squad should not
approach closer than 7 to 10 yards from the target.
b. Other effective ranges.
(1) Open fields of fire. When thickened gasoline is used, portable
flame throwers may fire with considerable effect as far as 40 yards under
normal conditions, depending on wind direction and wind speed. Under the
same conditions, liquid fuel maybe effective at 20 yards. Results and
accuracy are not as great as at point-blank range.
(2) Jungle or thick underbrush. If the target is located in jungle or thick
underbrush without cleared fields of fire, the effective range of the flame
thrower is reduced by as much as one half, depending on the nature and
density of the vegetation.
c. Ineffective ranges. Although the flame may reach considerably farther
than the ranges stated in b (1) above it may be useless because of the steep
angle of descent and because much of the fuel is burned before it reaches
the target.
23. WIND DEFLECTION.
Wind is an important factor because of the low velocity of the flaming fuel.
Wind can lengthen, shorten, or deflect the flame.
a. Head winds. Head winds of more than 5 miles per hour tend to carry
heat or even flame back toward the firer. Liquid fuel should not be fired into
a head wind of more than 5 miles per hour. The range and accuracy of
thickened fuels is reduced.
b. Following winds or very light winds. Best results are obtained under
these conditions.
c. Cross winds. When firing at or near maximum range, cross winds
deflect, breakup, and disperse the flame. They also reduce the range.
casualties to friendly personnel from possible ricochet or rebounding of
flame. If the target includes a vertical wall at a right angle to the firer or
other friendly personnel, the weapon should not be fired at closer than 7 to
10 yards. When the weapon is fired at small openings in a bunker or
pillbox, the firer and other members of the assault squad should not
approach closer than 7 to 10 yards from the target.
b. Other effective ranges.
(1) Open fields of fire. When thickened gasoline is used, portable
flame throwers may fire with considerable effect as far as 40 yards under
normal conditions, depending on wind direction and wind speed. Under the
same conditions, liquid fuel maybe effective at 20 yards. Results and
accuracy are not as great as at point-blank range.
(2) Jungle or thick underbrush. If the target is located in jungle or thick
underbrush without cleared fields of fire, the effective range of the flame
thrower is reduced by as much as one half, depending on the nature and
density of the vegetation.
c. Ineffective ranges. Although the flame may reach considerably farther
than the ranges stated in b (1) above it may be useless because of the steep
angle of descent and because much of the fuel is burned before it reaches
the target.
23. WIND DEFLECTION.
Wind is an important factor because of the low velocity of the flaming fuel.
Wind can lengthen, shorten, or deflect the flame.
a. Head winds. Head winds of more than 5 miles per hour tend to carry
heat or even flame back toward the firer. Liquid fuel should not be fired into
a head wind of more than 5 miles per hour. The range and accuracy of
thickened fuels is reduced.
b. Following winds or very light winds. Best results are obtained under
these conditions.
c. Cross winds. When firing at or near maximum range, cross winds
deflect, breakup, and disperse the flame. They also reduce the range.
Page 63
24. FIRING POSITIONS.
a. Ease of aiming. The flame thrower can be fired from any position that
permits sufficient freedom to aim the weapon, subject to the conditions in b,
c, and d, below. This includes standing, kneeling, and prone. In some
instances, flame throwers have been fired with tank groups resting on the
ground or on skids. If used in this way, the tops of the fuel tanks must be
propped up to conform to b, below.
b. Angles of the tanks. When firing, the bottoms of the fuel tanks must
always be substantially lower than the tops. The tops of both tanks must
also each be the same distance above the horizontal and neither tank should
be tilted to one side. Otherwise, only a small part of the fuel may be blown
from the tanks.
c. Recoil. Stability must be sufficient to withstand the recoil from the
gun. If possible, the firer should hold the gun snugly against his right side to
support it and to absorb its recoil.
d. Protection. Full advantage should be taken of cover and concealment,
such as shell craters and vegetation.
25. AIMING.
a. Sighting. There are no sights on the gun because of the short range
from which it is fired, the variety of fuels used, and the marked effects of
wind. (Par 23)
b. Fortifications. When firing at a fortified position, flame must be
directed into openings (gun ports, firing slits, ventilation screens,
doorways). Flame inside gives the desired effects, but flame on the outside
has little effect on personnel within.
c. Thickened fuel. (Figs 3 and 20) When firing at or near maximum
range, it may take several seconds for a burst of thickened fuel to carry
through the air to the target area. Short bursts may result in misses at long
range for this reason. Skill in aiming is particularly important with
thickened fuel.
d. Liquid fuel. With liquid fuel, the greatest effect may be obtained by
placing the flame directly on the target. (Fig 21)
a. Ease of aiming. The flame thrower can be fired from any position that
permits sufficient freedom to aim the weapon, subject to the conditions in b,
c, and d, below. This includes standing, kneeling, and prone. In some
instances, flame throwers have been fired with tank groups resting on the
ground or on skids. If used in this way, the tops of the fuel tanks must be
propped up to conform to b, below.
b. Angles of the tanks. When firing, the bottoms of the fuel tanks must
always be substantially lower than the tops. The tops of both tanks must
also each be the same distance above the horizontal and neither tank should
be tilted to one side. Otherwise, only a small part of the fuel may be blown
from the tanks.
c. Recoil. Stability must be sufficient to withstand the recoil from the
gun. If possible, the firer should hold the gun snugly against his right side to
support it and to absorb its recoil.
d. Protection. Full advantage should be taken of cover and concealment,
such as shell craters and vegetation.
25. AIMING.
a. Sighting. There are no sights on the gun because of the short range
from which it is fired, the variety of fuels used, and the marked effects of
wind. (Par 23)
b. Fortifications. When firing at a fortified position, flame must be
directed into openings (gun ports, firing slits, ventilation screens,
doorways). Flame inside gives the desired effects, but flame on the outside
has little effect on personnel within.
c. Thickened fuel. (Figs 3 and 20) When firing at or near maximum
range, it may take several seconds for a burst of thickened fuel to carry
through the air to the target area. Short bursts may result in misses at long
range for this reason. Skill in aiming is particularly important with
thickened fuel.
d. Liquid fuel. With liquid fuel, the greatest effect may be obtained by
placing the flame directly on the target. (Fig 21)
Page 64
Fig 20. Thickened fuel flame hitting and clinging to target. Fuel burns for
several minutes.
Fig 21. Flame (liquid fuel) hitting target.
26. FIRING.
several minutes.
Fig 21. Flame (liquid fuel) hitting target.
26. FIRING.
Page 65
With pressure-tank valve open:
a. Pull trigger. Pull the trigger rapidly and vigorously. A flash should
appear at the front of the gun. This shows that an incendiary charge of the
ignition cylinder has been ignited. Release the trigger. (If the flash does not
appear, pull the trigger again, or as often as necessary up to five times, until
a flash appears.)
b. Squeeze fuel valve. Immediately after pulling trigger, compress the
valve lever and grip safety vigorously with the right hand. Burning fuel will
be propelled from the gun.
c. Adjust fire. Direct the flaming fuel at the target. Continue to squeeze
the valve lever and grip safety throughout the burst. When thickened fuel is
fired, follow the fuel with eyes to the side of the stream in order to observe
and correct aim. (If eyes are directly behind the stream, the flame may
obscure the target.)
27. CEASING OR INTERRUPTING FIRE.
To cease or interrupt firing, release the controls.
28. ADDITIONAL BURSTS.
To fire additional bursts, repeat procedure followed in Paragraphs 26 and
27, keeping in mind that there are five incendiary charges in the ignition
cylinder and that the total firing time, not including time between bursts, is
approximately 8 to 9 seconds. Each of the five incendiary charges in the
ignition cylinder burns for from 8 to 12 seconds.
29. SOAKING THE TARGET.
When liquid fuel is used, it may be desirable to soak the target with fuel
first and ignite it afterward. To do this, fire one or two short bursts without
pulling the trigger. Then follow with an ignited burst, as in Paragraph 26.
30. AFTER FIRING.
When the firer has returned from his mission, he should:
a. Remove and discard the ignition cylinder, as follows:
(1) Point gun at the ground.
a. Pull trigger. Pull the trigger rapidly and vigorously. A flash should
appear at the front of the gun. This shows that an incendiary charge of the
ignition cylinder has been ignited. Release the trigger. (If the flash does not
appear, pull the trigger again, or as often as necessary up to five times, until
a flash appears.)
b. Squeeze fuel valve. Immediately after pulling trigger, compress the
valve lever and grip safety vigorously with the right hand. Burning fuel will
be propelled from the gun.
c. Adjust fire. Direct the flaming fuel at the target. Continue to squeeze
the valve lever and grip safety throughout the burst. When thickened fuel is
fired, follow the fuel with eyes to the side of the stream in order to observe
and correct aim. (If eyes are directly behind the stream, the flame may
obscure the target.)
27. CEASING OR INTERRUPTING FIRE.
To cease or interrupt firing, release the controls.
28. ADDITIONAL BURSTS.
To fire additional bursts, repeat procedure followed in Paragraphs 26 and
27, keeping in mind that there are five incendiary charges in the ignition
cylinder and that the total firing time, not including time between bursts, is
approximately 8 to 9 seconds. Each of the five incendiary charges in the
ignition cylinder burns for from 8 to 12 seconds.
29. SOAKING THE TARGET.
When liquid fuel is used, it may be desirable to soak the target with fuel
first and ignite it afterward. To do this, fire one or two short bursts without
pulling the trigger. Then follow with an ignited burst, as in Paragraph 26.
30. AFTER FIRING.
When the firer has returned from his mission, he should:
a. Remove and discard the ignition cylinder, as follows:
(1) Point gun at the ground.
Page 66
(2) Press latch. (Fig 14)
(3) Unscrew the ignition shield and allow ignition cylinder to fall out.
(Be careful to keep the hands away from the front of the cylinder.)
(4) Save the partly used cylinder for training use or destroy it by firing
from gun after fuel tanks have been emptied. For information on care,
handling, and storage of cylinders, see Paragraph 31.
b. Close the pressure-tank valve by turning valve handle clockwise (to
conserve remaining pressure in pressure tank).
c. Point the gun away from personnel and blow out the remaining fuel, if
any, from the fuel tanks by squeezing the valve lever and grip safety until
there is no further discharge. The trigger should not be used during this
operation.
d. Take off tank group from the back.
e. Inspect, clean, and maintain the flame thrower (Pars 55 and 56) or, if
experienced maintenance personnel is close at hand, turn the weapon over
to them for servicing.
f. After servicing, place the weapon in the packing chest (Par 77) for
protected storage, or prepare it for the next mission. (Pars 50 through 53)
(3) Unscrew the ignition shield and allow ignition cylinder to fall out.
(Be careful to keep the hands away from the front of the cylinder.)
(4) Save the partly used cylinder for training use or destroy it by firing
from gun after fuel tanks have been emptied. For information on care,
handling, and storage of cylinders, see Paragraph 31.
b. Close the pressure-tank valve by turning valve handle clockwise (to
conserve remaining pressure in pressure tank).
c. Point the gun away from personnel and blow out the remaining fuel, if
any, from the fuel tanks by squeezing the valve lever and grip safety until
there is no further discharge. The trigger should not be used during this
operation.
d. Take off tank group from the back.
e. Inspect, clean, and maintain the flame thrower (Pars 55 and 56) or, if
experienced maintenance personnel is close at hand, turn the weapon over
to them for servicing.
f. After servicing, place the weapon in the packing chest (Par 77) for
protected storage, or prepare it for the next mission. (Pars 50 through 53)
Page 67
Section VIII AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
31. IGNITION CYLINDER.
a. Description and functioning. (Figs 13 and 22) Either the M1 or E1
ignition cylinder may be used. It fits over the fore part of the barrel
assembly and is revolved by the spring case. (Par 76) The five incendiary
charges in the cylinder are spaced sufficiently far apart in the plastic body to
prevent their igniting one another. Lead-foil seals, plastic closure plates, and
waterproof cement make the unit comparatively waterproof.
Fig 22. Cutaway view of ignition cylinder (M1 or E1).
b. Action. When the trigger rod is pushed forward, one of five metal
matches tipped with red phosphorus scratches an igniting mixture. The
31. IGNITION CYLINDER.
a. Description and functioning. (Figs 13 and 22) Either the M1 or E1
ignition cylinder may be used. It fits over the fore part of the barrel
assembly and is revolved by the spring case. (Par 76) The five incendiary
charges in the cylinder are spaced sufficiently far apart in the plastic body to
prevent their igniting one another. Lead-foil seals, plastic closure plates, and
waterproof cement make the unit comparatively waterproof.
Fig 22. Cutaway view of ignition cylinder (M1 or E1).
b. Action. When the trigger rod is pushed forward, one of five metal
matches tipped with red phosphorus scratches an igniting mixture. The
Page 68
ignition carries to a starter mix and to a few grains of black powder on top
of the incendiary charge. The black powder blows the foil seal and closure
plate clear of the flame thrower, and the incendiary charge ignites the fuel
as it is discharged from the nozzle. The incendiary charge burns for from 8
to 12 seconds.
c. Packing. Ignition cylinders are packed two per waterproof can. Three
cans are furnished with each flame thrower. Fifty cans (100 ignition
cylinders) are contained in each packing box of extra cylinders.
d. Care, handling, and storage. Ignition cylinders contain hazardous
incendiary material and must be handled with due care. The following
precautions should be observed.
(1) Opening cans. Do not open cans containing cylinders until ready to
load for a mission. (Par 18) If an extra cylinder remains in an opened can,
use it as soon as possible. Any defective cylinders, such as those with
damaged closure plates, should be destroyed. (Pars 30 and 46) Moisture
may affect the cylinders and all possible care should be taken to avoid
exposing them to dampness.
(2) Handling cylinders. Pressure on any of the five metal matches (Fig
13) may ignite an incendiary charge in the cylinder. Care must be exercised
to avoid putting pressure on the projecting ends of the matches except when
firing the weapon. Ignition cylinders and cylinder containers should be
protected against shock. Boxes and cans containing cylinders must not be
thrown or dropped.
(3) Storing containers. Containers of ignition cylinders are best stored
in a dry, well-ventilated place, out of the direct rays of the sun, well
protected against excessive temperatures. Smoking is not permitted and
matches are not used where ignition cylinders are stored.
32. CHARGING PRESSURE TANK.
a. General. The pressure tank of the flame thrower must be fully charged
with compressed air or compressed nitrogen before the start of a mission.
For the M2-2 flame thrower, a pressure of at least 1,700 pounds per square
inch is required. This may be provided either by the use of an air
compressor capable of producing a pressure of at least 1,700 pounds per
square inch, or by the use of commercial cylinders. The filling and charging
of the incendiary charge. The black powder blows the foil seal and closure
plate clear of the flame thrower, and the incendiary charge ignites the fuel
as it is discharged from the nozzle. The incendiary charge burns for from 8
to 12 seconds.
c. Packing. Ignition cylinders are packed two per waterproof can. Three
cans are furnished with each flame thrower. Fifty cans (100 ignition
cylinders) are contained in each packing box of extra cylinders.
d. Care, handling, and storage. Ignition cylinders contain hazardous
incendiary material and must be handled with due care. The following
precautions should be observed.
(1) Opening cans. Do not open cans containing cylinders until ready to
load for a mission. (Par 18) If an extra cylinder remains in an opened can,
use it as soon as possible. Any defective cylinders, such as those with
damaged closure plates, should be destroyed. (Pars 30 and 46) Moisture
may affect the cylinders and all possible care should be taken to avoid
exposing them to dampness.
(2) Handling cylinders. Pressure on any of the five metal matches (Fig
13) may ignite an incendiary charge in the cylinder. Care must be exercised
to avoid putting pressure on the projecting ends of the matches except when
firing the weapon. Ignition cylinders and cylinder containers should be
protected against shock. Boxes and cans containing cylinders must not be
thrown or dropped.
(3) Storing containers. Containers of ignition cylinders are best stored
in a dry, well-ventilated place, out of the direct rays of the sun, well
protected against excessive temperatures. Smoking is not permitted and
matches are not used where ignition cylinders are stored.
32. CHARGING PRESSURE TANK.
a. General. The pressure tank of the flame thrower must be fully charged
with compressed air or compressed nitrogen before the start of a mission.
For the M2-2 flame thrower, a pressure of at least 1,700 pounds per square
inch is required. This may be provided either by the use of an air
compressor capable of producing a pressure of at least 1,700 pounds per
square inch, or by the use of commercial cylinders. The filling and charging
Page 69
lines from the service kit are used in conjunction with the cylinders. Before
and after charging, follow the procedures described in Paragraphs 51 and
55.
b. Charging from air compressor. Compressor, air, gasoline engine
driven, 7CFM, M1, is a self-contained, skid-mounted machine designed for
use with flame throwers. It is capable of charging pressure tanks of flame
throwers and large 200- or 220-cubic-foot commercial cylinders as well.
Instructions for use of the compressor will be found in the manual
accompanying it.
c. Charging from cylinders. If an air compressor is not available, it is
necessary to use cylinders containing nitrogen or air.
(1) Volume and pressure. Cylinders come charged with 200 to 220
cubic feet of air or nitrogen. Since cylinders with 220 cubic feet of air or
nitrogen have a higher initial pressure, it is recommended that they be
procured, if obtainable. All cylinders used must have a pressure of at least
600 pounds per square inch. One or more of the cylinders must have a
pressure of at least 1,800 pounds per square inch. Two or more cylinders,
preferably at least four, should be used, if available.
(2) Charging capacity. Fully charged cylinders, if properly used in
rotation, have capacity for charging pressure tanks approximately as
follows:
1 cylinder (used alone) 2 pressure tanks
2 cylinders (in combination) 6 pressure tanks
4 cylinders (in combination) 24 pressure tanks
5 cylinders (in combination) 36 pressure tanks
6 cylinders (in combination) 48 pressure tanks
(3) Apparatus. The apparatus for charging two pressure tanks by the
use of cylinders consists of a filling line, two charging lines, and two
cylinders. (Fig 23) The filling line and charging lines are obtained from the
service kit. (Par 48) Plugs are provided to close off either half of the filling
line when only one flame-thrower tank group is to be charged.
(4) Warning. Oxygen is sometimes shipped in cylinders having the
same threads as nitrogen cylinders. If oxygen not mixed with nitrogen, as in
and after charging, follow the procedures described in Paragraphs 51 and
55.
b. Charging from air compressor. Compressor, air, gasoline engine
driven, 7CFM, M1, is a self-contained, skid-mounted machine designed for
use with flame throwers. It is capable of charging pressure tanks of flame
throwers and large 200- or 220-cubic-foot commercial cylinders as well.
Instructions for use of the compressor will be found in the manual
accompanying it.
c. Charging from cylinders. If an air compressor is not available, it is
necessary to use cylinders containing nitrogen or air.
(1) Volume and pressure. Cylinders come charged with 200 to 220
cubic feet of air or nitrogen. Since cylinders with 220 cubic feet of air or
nitrogen have a higher initial pressure, it is recommended that they be
procured, if obtainable. All cylinders used must have a pressure of at least
600 pounds per square inch. One or more of the cylinders must have a
pressure of at least 1,800 pounds per square inch. Two or more cylinders,
preferably at least four, should be used, if available.
(2) Charging capacity. Fully charged cylinders, if properly used in
rotation, have capacity for charging pressure tanks approximately as
follows:
1 cylinder (used alone) 2 pressure tanks
2 cylinders (in combination) 6 pressure tanks
4 cylinders (in combination) 24 pressure tanks
5 cylinders (in combination) 36 pressure tanks
6 cylinders (in combination) 48 pressure tanks
(3) Apparatus. The apparatus for charging two pressure tanks by the
use of cylinders consists of a filling line, two charging lines, and two
cylinders. (Fig 23) The filling line and charging lines are obtained from the
service kit. (Par 48) Plugs are provided to close off either half of the filling
line when only one flame-thrower tank group is to be charged.
(4) Warning. Oxygen is sometimes shipped in cylinders having the
same threads as nitrogen cylinders. If oxygen not mixed with nitrogen, as in
Page 70
air, is introduced into the fuel tanks of the portable flame thrower, a violent
explosion may result. Therefore, the greatest care must be exercised to see
that only air or nitrogen is used. Before a cylinder is connected, it should be
tested to determine that it does not contain straight oxygen or some
combustible gas. This may be done by introducing a burning splint into a jet
of the contents. Oxygen causes the splint to burn quickly, whereas nitrogen
extinguishes the flame. To make the test:
(a) Fasten a thin splint of wood to a wire at least a foot long.
(b) Ignite the splint.
(c) Stand aside and hold it before the cylinder outlet.
(d) Crack the valve slightly to permit a small stream of gas to
emerge.
(e) If the flame flares up, the gas is oxygen and MUST NOT be
used.
(f) If the gas itself catches fire, it may be hydrogen, acetylene, or
some other combustible gas, which also must not be used.
(5) Attaching lines to cylinders. (Fig 23) The procedure for charging
two flame thrower pressure tanks from two cylinders of nitrogen or
compressed air begins as follows:
(a) Remove the valve-protection caps from the cylinders.
explosion may result. Therefore, the greatest care must be exercised to see
that only air or nitrogen is used. Before a cylinder is connected, it should be
tested to determine that it does not contain straight oxygen or some
combustible gas. This may be done by introducing a burning splint into a jet
of the contents. Oxygen causes the splint to burn quickly, whereas nitrogen
extinguishes the flame. To make the test:
(a) Fasten a thin splint of wood to a wire at least a foot long.
(b) Ignite the splint.
(c) Stand aside and hold it before the cylinder outlet.
(d) Crack the valve slightly to permit a small stream of gas to
emerge.
(e) If the flame flares up, the gas is oxygen and MUST NOT be
used.
(f) If the gas itself catches fire, it may be hydrogen, acetylene, or
some other combustible gas, which also must not be used.
(5) Attaching lines to cylinders. (Fig 23) The procedure for charging
two flame thrower pressure tanks from two cylinders of nitrogen or
compressed air begins as follows:
(a) Remove the valve-protection caps from the cylinders.
Page 71
Fig 23. Charging two pressure tanks, using charging and filling lines, and
cylinders of compressed air or nitrogen.
(b) Place the cylinders side by side with both outlets facing in the
same direction. (If the ground is not level enough for the cylinders to stand
up side by side, lay them horizontally with both outlets face up.)
(c) Before attaching the filling line to the cylinders, blow out dust.
(Par 33) Then connect, using wrenches to make the joints pressure tight. Do
cylinders of compressed air or nitrogen.
(b) Place the cylinders side by side with both outlets facing in the
same direction. (If the ground is not level enough for the cylinders to stand
up side by side, lay them horizontally with both outlets face up.)
(c) Before attaching the filling line to the cylinders, blow out dust.
(Par 33) Then connect, using wrenches to make the joints pressure tight. Do
Page 72
not kink or bend the flexible hose. Cylinders must be close enough together
to prevent strain on the flexible hose.
(d) Attach a charging line to each of the two couplings on the filling
line.
(6) Attaching charging lines to pressure tanks.
(a) Close pressure-tank valves.
(b) Unscrew caps from check valves.
(c) Screw the charging-line fittings onto the check valves.
(d) Close bleeders.
(7) Charging. The operation of charging two pressure tanks from two
cylinders is as follows:
(a) Close both filling-line valves.
(b) Open cylinder valves.
(c) Determine which cylinder has the lower pressure by the gages.
Open the filling-line valve at the gage showing the lower pressure and fill
the pressure tanks to the pressure shown by the gage. Close the valve. Then
open the other filling-line valve and fill the pressure tanks until they reach
pressures of at least 1,700 pounds per square inch as shown by the gage.
(d) When the pressure tanks have been filled, close the filling-line
valves. Open the bleeders on the charging lines and leave them open until
the pressure in the charging lines is released. Then close bleeders. Remove
the charging-line fittings from the check valves. Screw the threaded caps on
the check valves and tighten caps with a wrench.
(e) Repeat steps in (a) through (d) above for as many pairs of empty
flame-thrower tanks as require charging.
(8) To insure proper pressure. Care should be taken to make certain
that the compression delivered to the flame-thrower pressure tank is a full
1,700 pounds per square inch.
(a) If a filling-line valve leaks, tighten the packing nut on the valve
with a wrench.
to prevent strain on the flexible hose.
(d) Attach a charging line to each of the two couplings on the filling
line.
(6) Attaching charging lines to pressure tanks.
(a) Close pressure-tank valves.
(b) Unscrew caps from check valves.
(c) Screw the charging-line fittings onto the check valves.
(d) Close bleeders.
(7) Charging. The operation of charging two pressure tanks from two
cylinders is as follows:
(a) Close both filling-line valves.
(b) Open cylinder valves.
(c) Determine which cylinder has the lower pressure by the gages.
Open the filling-line valve at the gage showing the lower pressure and fill
the pressure tanks to the pressure shown by the gage. Close the valve. Then
open the other filling-line valve and fill the pressure tanks until they reach
pressures of at least 1,700 pounds per square inch as shown by the gage.
(d) When the pressure tanks have been filled, close the filling-line
valves. Open the bleeders on the charging lines and leave them open until
the pressure in the charging lines is released. Then close bleeders. Remove
the charging-line fittings from the check valves. Screw the threaded caps on
the check valves and tighten caps with a wrench.
(e) Repeat steps in (a) through (d) above for as many pairs of empty
flame-thrower tanks as require charging.
(8) To insure proper pressure. Care should be taken to make certain
that the compression delivered to the flame-thrower pressure tank is a full
1,700 pounds per square inch.
(a) If a filling-line valve leaks, tighten the packing nut on the valve
with a wrench.
Page 73
(b) When the higher pressure shown on the filling-line gages is less
than 1,700 pounds per square inch, close the filling-line valve and the
cylinder valve on the cylinder having the lower pressure. Remove and
replace this cylinder with a fully charged cylinder. With chalk, mark the
pressure on the cylinder which has been withdrawn.
(9) After charging. When charging has been completed:
(a) Close the filling-line valves. Observe the pressure indicated on
each gage and mark the pressure on each cylinder using crayon, chalk, or
pencil.
(b) Close the valves on the cylinders.
(c) Remove the charging-line fittings from the check valves, replace
the threaded caps on the check valves, and tighten caps with a wrench.
(d) Remove the filling lines from the cylinders. Use two wrenches
and take care not to twist or kink the flexible hose. Support the lines during
the operation so that their full weight does not hang on the flexible hose
during removal.
than 1,700 pounds per square inch, close the filling-line valve and the
cylinder valve on the cylinder having the lower pressure. Remove and
replace this cylinder with a fully charged cylinder. With chalk, mark the
pressure on the cylinder which has been withdrawn.
(9) After charging. When charging has been completed:
(a) Close the filling-line valves. Observe the pressure indicated on
each gage and mark the pressure on each cylinder using crayon, chalk, or
pencil.
(b) Close the valves on the cylinders.
(c) Remove the charging-line fittings from the check valves, replace
the threaded caps on the check valves, and tighten caps with a wrench.
(d) Remove the filling lines from the cylinders. Use two wrenches
and take care not to twist or kink the flexible hose. Support the lines during
the operation so that their full weight does not hang on the flexible hose
during removal.
Page 74
Fig 24. Arrangement of cylinders and lines for charging four flame
throwers. Flexible hose (assembly E81-3-6) from service kit is used to
connect two filling lines.
(10) Use of four-place lines. (Fig 24) The filling and charging lines
found in two or more service kits may be combined for more efficient
charging of large numbers of pressure tanks. An additional flexible hose is
provided in each service kit for connecting two filling lines. The procedure
for charging is similar to that described above for the two-place line. Air or
nitrogen is taken first from the cylinder with the lowest pressure and last
from the cylinder with the highest pressure. See a (2) above.
33. PRECAUTIONS WHEN PRESSURE-CHARGING.
Personnel will familiarize themselves with the following precautions:
a. Handling. Handle all cylinders and flame throwers carefully; never
drop them and never subject them to shocks or blows. Keep valve-
protection caps secured when cylinders are being handled, except when
such handling is incident to the use of the nitrogen or air.
b. Storage. Keep all cylinders and charged flame throwers or tank groups
(Par 77) in open or closed storage. They must, however, be protected from
dampness and excessive rise in temperature caused by the direct rays of the
sun or other source of heat. Avoid storing them near highly flammable
substances, or in places where they may be struck by moving objects.
Segregate empty cylinders to avoid confusion.
c. Personnel. Do not attempt to use compressed gases unless trained in
this work. Use gases only for the purposes for which they are intended.
d. Cylinder valves. Do not tamper with safety devices in cylinder valves.
If available, use the proper replacement parts for safety devices which are in
need of repair. If such parts are not available, do not attempt to use
makeshifts or nonstandard parts.
e. Opening of valves. Open valves slowly and fully each time nitrogen or
compressed air is transferred from a cylinder. When a wrench is used, be
sure it is one that fits properly, and that it is kept ready for instant use while
the compressed gas is being released.
throwers. Flexible hose (assembly E81-3-6) from service kit is used to
connect two filling lines.
(10) Use of four-place lines. (Fig 24) The filling and charging lines
found in two or more service kits may be combined for more efficient
charging of large numbers of pressure tanks. An additional flexible hose is
provided in each service kit for connecting two filling lines. The procedure
for charging is similar to that described above for the two-place line. Air or
nitrogen is taken first from the cylinder with the lowest pressure and last
from the cylinder with the highest pressure. See a (2) above.
33. PRECAUTIONS WHEN PRESSURE-CHARGING.
Personnel will familiarize themselves with the following precautions:
a. Handling. Handle all cylinders and flame throwers carefully; never
drop them and never subject them to shocks or blows. Keep valve-
protection caps secured when cylinders are being handled, except when
such handling is incident to the use of the nitrogen or air.
b. Storage. Keep all cylinders and charged flame throwers or tank groups
(Par 77) in open or closed storage. They must, however, be protected from
dampness and excessive rise in temperature caused by the direct rays of the
sun or other source of heat. Avoid storing them near highly flammable
substances, or in places where they may be struck by moving objects.
Segregate empty cylinders to avoid confusion.
c. Personnel. Do not attempt to use compressed gases unless trained in
this work. Use gases only for the purposes for which they are intended.
d. Cylinder valves. Do not tamper with safety devices in cylinder valves.
If available, use the proper replacement parts for safety devices which are in
need of repair. If such parts are not available, do not attempt to use
makeshifts or nonstandard parts.
e. Opening of valves. Open valves slowly and fully each time nitrogen or
compressed air is transferred from a cylinder. When a wrench is used, be
sure it is one that fits properly, and that it is kept ready for instant use while
the compressed gas is being released.
Page 75
f. Threads. See that threads match before making connections. Some
valves are provided with special threads which must be matched by the
threads in the equipment being connected.
g. Correct equipment. Use gages, regulators, hose, pipe, and tubing of the
type manufactured or specified for the particular apparatus or compressed
gas.
h. Repair. Never attempt to alter or repair a cylinder.
i. Flames and sparks. Do not permit flames, sparks, or ignition from the
flame thrower or other source to touch hose.
j. Blowing out dust. Immediately before coupling an attachment to the
pressure tank or cylinder valve, open it for an instant to blow out any dust
or dirt. Never stand where gas or dirt may be blown into the eyes or face. If
the valve is difficult to open, apply more force gradually.
k. Special devices. Do not attempt to use any special connections or
equipment without the approval of a qualified expert.
l. Keeping valves closed. Keep the valve of each cylinder closed when its
contents are not actually being released from or admitted to the cylinder.
This applies alike to all cylinders, whether they contain a compressed gas or
are empty.
34. CHARACTERISTICS OF FUELS.
Thickened fuels give up to twice the range of liquid fuels. The stream of
thickened fuel is comparatively narrow. Most of the glue-like fuel clings to
and burns in or on the target for as long as 6 minutes. Liquid fuels, on the
other hand, are largely consumed in flight to the target. If the location of
small openings in the target is known, the stream of thickened fuel can be
spotted by accurate aiming so that most of the fuel enters directly into the
openings. While it does not billow around corners as does liquid fuel,
thickened fuel strikes the target with force enough to ricochet inside. It
clings to skin and clothing while burning. It also has excellent incendiary
effects. The initial flame and smoke are less from thickened fuel than from
liquid fuel, but the lower visibility, greater range, and much longer burning
period of thickened fuel compensate for its smaller screening effect. Liquid
fuels are easier to pour when filling than are thickened fuels.
valves are provided with special threads which must be matched by the
threads in the equipment being connected.
g. Correct equipment. Use gages, regulators, hose, pipe, and tubing of the
type manufactured or specified for the particular apparatus or compressed
gas.
h. Repair. Never attempt to alter or repair a cylinder.
i. Flames and sparks. Do not permit flames, sparks, or ignition from the
flame thrower or other source to touch hose.
j. Blowing out dust. Immediately before coupling an attachment to the
pressure tank or cylinder valve, open it for an instant to blow out any dust
or dirt. Never stand where gas or dirt may be blown into the eyes or face. If
the valve is difficult to open, apply more force gradually.
k. Special devices. Do not attempt to use any special connections or
equipment without the approval of a qualified expert.
l. Keeping valves closed. Keep the valve of each cylinder closed when its
contents are not actually being released from or admitted to the cylinder.
This applies alike to all cylinders, whether they contain a compressed gas or
are empty.
34. CHARACTERISTICS OF FUELS.
Thickened fuels give up to twice the range of liquid fuels. The stream of
thickened fuel is comparatively narrow. Most of the glue-like fuel clings to
and burns in or on the target for as long as 6 minutes. Liquid fuels, on the
other hand, are largely consumed in flight to the target. If the location of
small openings in the target is known, the stream of thickened fuel can be
spotted by accurate aiming so that most of the fuel enters directly into the
openings. While it does not billow around corners as does liquid fuel,
thickened fuel strikes the target with force enough to ricochet inside. It
clings to skin and clothing while burning. It also has excellent incendiary
effects. The initial flame and smoke are less from thickened fuel than from
liquid fuel, but the lower visibility, greater range, and much longer burning
period of thickened fuel compensate for its smaller screening effect. Liquid
fuels are easier to pour when filling than are thickened fuels.
Page 76
35. PREPARATION OF THICKENED FUELS.
a. Ingredients. Thickened fuels consist of U.S. Army fuel thickener mixed
with fuel.
(1) Thickener. U.S. Army thickener is supplied in airtight cans, each
containing 5-1/4 pounds of the material.
(2) Gasoline and fuel oil. Gasoline alone is often used with thickener,
but mixtures of gasoline and light fuel oil may be used satisfactorily. The
light fuel oil can be either No. 1 fuel oil, No. 2 fuel oil, automotive diesel
oil, or kerosene. These mixtures give more heat and do not form crusts.
Except in hot climates, 75 percent or more of the mixture by weight or
volume should be gasoline. (If too much light fuel oil is included, the fuel
tends to separate into two layers.) In tropical theaters, a thickened blend of
50 percent gasoline and 50 percent light fuel oil has been reported to give
favorable results. Storage qualities are not known, however. Another
mixture which has been well recommended in field reports is 15 gallons of
gasoline to 5 gallons of diesel fuel oil. Issue gasoline may be used, but
locally procured gasolines which contain alcohol are not suitable.
b. Proportion of thickener to fuel. Less thickener is recommended than
formerly. A low ratio of thickener gives a thickened fuel with many of the
characteristics of liquid fuel. One can of thickener to 20 U.S. gallons of
gasoline, or gasoline and light fuel-oil mixture, gives good results. This is a
4.2 percent by weight mixture. Except in hot weather, a fuel mixture of less
than 3 percent thickener requires such long stirring that its preparation is
impractical.
c. Equipment. An open-head 55-gallon or 42-gallon drum and an
improvised wooden mixing paddle are used. Five-gallon cans may be
employed to transfer the ingredients. The paddle should be approximately 5
feet long, 2 inches wide, and 1 inch thick. If a standard 55-gallon, open-
head drum with an internal diameter of 27-7/16 inches is used, the
improvised paddle should be marked to indicate gallons as follows:
Gallons Inches
40 23-1/2
20 11-3/4
a. Ingredients. Thickened fuels consist of U.S. Army fuel thickener mixed
with fuel.
(1) Thickener. U.S. Army thickener is supplied in airtight cans, each
containing 5-1/4 pounds of the material.
(2) Gasoline and fuel oil. Gasoline alone is often used with thickener,
but mixtures of gasoline and light fuel oil may be used satisfactorily. The
light fuel oil can be either No. 1 fuel oil, No. 2 fuel oil, automotive diesel
oil, or kerosene. These mixtures give more heat and do not form crusts.
Except in hot climates, 75 percent or more of the mixture by weight or
volume should be gasoline. (If too much light fuel oil is included, the fuel
tends to separate into two layers.) In tropical theaters, a thickened blend of
50 percent gasoline and 50 percent light fuel oil has been reported to give
favorable results. Storage qualities are not known, however. Another
mixture which has been well recommended in field reports is 15 gallons of
gasoline to 5 gallons of diesel fuel oil. Issue gasoline may be used, but
locally procured gasolines which contain alcohol are not suitable.
b. Proportion of thickener to fuel. Less thickener is recommended than
formerly. A low ratio of thickener gives a thickened fuel with many of the
characteristics of liquid fuel. One can of thickener to 20 U.S. gallons of
gasoline, or gasoline and light fuel-oil mixture, gives good results. This is a
4.2 percent by weight mixture. Except in hot weather, a fuel mixture of less
than 3 percent thickener requires such long stirring that its preparation is
impractical.
c. Equipment. An open-head 55-gallon or 42-gallon drum and an
improvised wooden mixing paddle are used. Five-gallon cans may be
employed to transfer the ingredients. The paddle should be approximately 5
feet long, 2 inches wide, and 1 inch thick. If a standard 55-gallon, open-
head drum with an internal diameter of 27-7/16 inches is used, the
improvised paddle should be marked to indicate gallons as follows:
Gallons Inches
40 23-1/2
20 11-3/4
Page 77
Do not use a metal paddle because of the danger of striking a spark from
the drum. Never use galvanized containers for mixing and storing thickened
fuels. These may cause the fuel to break down and become excessively thin.
An improvised funnel may be helpful in filling drums with prepared fuel for
aging or transporting.
d. Temperatures.
(1) Below 50 degrees. If the temperature is below 50 degrees
Fahrenheit, it is helpful to prepare thickened fuel indoors, in a heated room.
All precautions should be particularly observed. (Par 40)
(2) Above 90 degrees. When the fuel is hotter than 90 degrees
Fahrenheit, the thickener reacts very rapidly. In this case, it is easier to
prepare batches of 20 gallons each, but any number of batches may be
prepared in succession.
e. Moisture.
(1) Effect of moisture. Water in thickened fuel breaks down or reduces
the viscosity of the gel and thereby reduces the range of the flame thrower.
This effect may not be noticeable at once, but the stability of the fuel is
affected.
(2) Dryness of thickener. Dry thickener is extremely hygroscopic, that
is, it absorbs moisture from the atmosphere very rapidly. For this reason,
thickener is shipped in hermetically sealed tin cans containing the exact
quantity of powder required for mixing with 20 gallons of fuel to prepare a
4.2 percent mixture. It is important that the gasoline or fuel oil and gasoline
be measured out before the thickener container is opened. The powder then
should be poured immediately into the liquid.
(3) Dryness of containers. It is important that all containers used in
mixing and handling the fuel be dry.
(4) Keeping water out of gasoline. Gasoline, especially when it has
been stored in vented containers, frequently includes free water. Therefore,
when using gasoline from a bulk-storage tank or an open drum, first place it
in a clean, dry drum; allow it to stand quietly for at least an hour; then
carefully pour off the gasoline from the top and discard the last gallon or
two.
the drum. Never use galvanized containers for mixing and storing thickened
fuels. These may cause the fuel to break down and become excessively thin.
An improvised funnel may be helpful in filling drums with prepared fuel for
aging or transporting.
d. Temperatures.
(1) Below 50 degrees. If the temperature is below 50 degrees
Fahrenheit, it is helpful to prepare thickened fuel indoors, in a heated room.
All precautions should be particularly observed. (Par 40)
(2) Above 90 degrees. When the fuel is hotter than 90 degrees
Fahrenheit, the thickener reacts very rapidly. In this case, it is easier to
prepare batches of 20 gallons each, but any number of batches may be
prepared in succession.
e. Moisture.
(1) Effect of moisture. Water in thickened fuel breaks down or reduces
the viscosity of the gel and thereby reduces the range of the flame thrower.
This effect may not be noticeable at once, but the stability of the fuel is
affected.
(2) Dryness of thickener. Dry thickener is extremely hygroscopic, that
is, it absorbs moisture from the atmosphere very rapidly. For this reason,
thickener is shipped in hermetically sealed tin cans containing the exact
quantity of powder required for mixing with 20 gallons of fuel to prepare a
4.2 percent mixture. It is important that the gasoline or fuel oil and gasoline
be measured out before the thickener container is opened. The powder then
should be poured immediately into the liquid.
(3) Dryness of containers. It is important that all containers used in
mixing and handling the fuel be dry.
(4) Keeping water out of gasoline. Gasoline, especially when it has
been stored in vented containers, frequently includes free water. Therefore,
when using gasoline from a bulk-storage tank or an open drum, first place it
in a clean, dry drum; allow it to stand quietly for at least an hour; then
carefully pour off the gasoline from the top and discard the last gallon or
two.
Page 78
f. Pouring and stirring. (Fig 25) The liquid fuel is poured into the open
drum; a pail or a paddle (Par 35 c) is used for measuring. One man then
stirs the fuel vigorously. Another takes a can of thickener, splits it with a
machete, bayonet, or ax, and pours it immediately into the fuel. Any large
lumps of powder are broken by hand before the powder is added to the fuel.
When mixing 40 gallons at a time, the two cans of thickener should be
opened and added to the fuel in rapid succession. If the contents of the first
can are permitted to gel before adding the second can, it will be difficult to
obtain a uniform mix. Continue to stir.
Fig 25. Measuring fuel ingredient into mixing drum. Paddle for
measuring and stirring is improvised.
drum; a pail or a paddle (Par 35 c) is used for measuring. One man then
stirs the fuel vigorously. Another takes a can of thickener, splits it with a
machete, bayonet, or ax, and pours it immediately into the fuel. Any large
lumps of powder are broken by hand before the powder is added to the fuel.
When mixing 40 gallons at a time, the two cans of thickener should be
opened and added to the fuel in rapid succession. If the contents of the first
can are permitted to gel before adding the second can, it will be difficult to
obtain a uniform mix. Continue to stir.
Fig 25. Measuring fuel ingredient into mixing drum. Paddle for
measuring and stirring is improvised.
Page 79
Fig 26. Transferring newly mixed thickened fuel from mixing drum to
storage or shipping container for aging.
g. Examining fuel. Lift the paddle quickly. If the mixture drops or runs
from the paddle, additional stirring is necessary. When the paddle comes
out clean, except for an adhering film, stirring should be stopped, provided
there is no further visible settling of particles of thickener.
h. Loading shipping drums. When stirring is completed, the mix is
immediately bucketed (Fig 26) through a funnel into the shipping drum.
The second bung hole should be open, if possible, to provide a vent to aid in
pouring. Two men do the bucketing, each handling one pail so that the
funnel may be kept loaded with mix and the shipping drum filled as rapidly
as possible. Finally, the open-end drum should be picked up and its contents
poured into the funnel. Not more than 50 gallons of thickened fuel should
be loaded into a 55-gallon drum. The funnel should then be removed and
replaced by a plug. The vent opening of the drum should also be closed.
(See Paragraph 39 for pressure method of filling storage drums.)
storage or shipping container for aging.
g. Examining fuel. Lift the paddle quickly. If the mixture drops or runs
from the paddle, additional stirring is necessary. When the paddle comes
out clean, except for an adhering film, stirring should be stopped, provided
there is no further visible settling of particles of thickener.
h. Loading shipping drums. When stirring is completed, the mix is
immediately bucketed (Fig 26) through a funnel into the shipping drum.
The second bung hole should be open, if possible, to provide a vent to aid in
pouring. Two men do the bucketing, each handling one pail so that the
funnel may be kept loaded with mix and the shipping drum filled as rapidly
as possible. Finally, the open-end drum should be picked up and its contents
poured into the funnel. Not more than 50 gallons of thickened fuel should
be loaded into a 55-gallon drum. The funnel should then be removed and
replaced by a plug. The vent opening of the drum should also be closed.
(See Paragraph 39 for pressure method of filling storage drums.)
Page 80
i. Unused thickener. Any thickener remaining in opened cans should be
discarded. Since moisture in the air can quickly ruin its properties, no
attempt should be made to save it.
j. Aging and storing. Newly mixed fuel has the appearance of tapioca
pudding. (Fig 27) It should preferably be stored overnight before use. It
may, however, be fired within 1 hour after mixing. To keep fuel in good
condition, drums for shipping and storing must be clean, moistureproof,
dry, strong, and unrusted, but not galvanized. They must be kept tightly
closed and should be laid on their sides so that rain water will not collect
around the bungs.
k. Testing fuel. Before use on missions, all fuels should be tested by
being fired from a flame thrower. This is advisable because the
characteristics of the fuel ingredients often vary.
Fig 27. Contrasting newly mixed thickened fuel (right) with aged fuel
(left).
36. PREPARATION OF LIQUID FUELS.
discarded. Since moisture in the air can quickly ruin its properties, no
attempt should be made to save it.
j. Aging and storing. Newly mixed fuel has the appearance of tapioca
pudding. (Fig 27) It should preferably be stored overnight before use. It
may, however, be fired within 1 hour after mixing. To keep fuel in good
condition, drums for shipping and storing must be clean, moistureproof,
dry, strong, and unrusted, but not galvanized. They must be kept tightly
closed and should be laid on their sides so that rain water will not collect
around the bungs.
k. Testing fuel. Before use on missions, all fuels should be tested by
being fired from a flame thrower. This is advisable because the
characteristics of the fuel ingredients often vary.
Fig 27. Contrasting newly mixed thickened fuel (right) with aged fuel
(left).
36. PREPARATION OF LIQUID FUELS.
Page 81
a. Choice of ingredients. Thin fuels are easy to ignite, but they lack range
and are largely burned in flight before reaching the target. For this reason,
liquid fuels should contain the lowest proportion of gasoline and the highest
proportion of heavier oils that permits easy ignition. In hot climates, less
gasoline is needed than in cold climates. Exactness of proportion, however,
is not of great importance. Suitable blends are as follows:
(1) Equal parts by weight or by volume of gasoline, light fuel oil, and
heavy (bunker) fuel oil. The light fuel oil can be either No. 1 fuel oil, No. 2
fuel oil, automotive diesel oil, or kerosene.
(2) One part gasoline to four parts of cleaned crankcase drainings. (Par
36e) Unused motor lubricating oil can be employed in place of crankcase
drainings, but usually it will be unavailable for flame-thrower use.
b. Preparation of ingredients. Before mixing blends, the following steps
should be taken:
(1) Gasoline, diesel oils, and fuel oils. These fuel materials should be
allowed to stand quietly for at least 30 minutes to permit any small quantity
of water present to settle to the bottom. When transferring the fuel to
another container, remove the fuel carefully so that no water is remixed
with it.
(2) Crankcase drainings. If possible, crankcase drainings should be
allowed to stand quietly in a container for at least 1 day. When pouring, take
care to prevent the transfer of any of the sludge which may have settled in
the bottom of the container.
c. Equipment. An open-head 55-gallon or 42-gallon drum and an
improvised wooden mixing paddle are used. The paddle should be
approximately 5 feet long, 2 inches wide, and 1 inch thick. A metal paddle
should not be provided because of the danger of striking a spark from the
drum. Five-gallon cans may also be furnished for measuring and
transferring ingredients. Clean, unrusted, steel storage drums should be at
hand. They should be at least 16-gage to have sufficient strength to
withstand the internal vapor pressure of the fuel.
d. Stirring. All the ingredients should be stirred in the drum with the
paddle until they appear to form a uniform mixture. This should require
approximately 2 minutes.
and are largely burned in flight before reaching the target. For this reason,
liquid fuels should contain the lowest proportion of gasoline and the highest
proportion of heavier oils that permits easy ignition. In hot climates, less
gasoline is needed than in cold climates. Exactness of proportion, however,
is not of great importance. Suitable blends are as follows:
(1) Equal parts by weight or by volume of gasoline, light fuel oil, and
heavy (bunker) fuel oil. The light fuel oil can be either No. 1 fuel oil, No. 2
fuel oil, automotive diesel oil, or kerosene.
(2) One part gasoline to four parts of cleaned crankcase drainings. (Par
36e) Unused motor lubricating oil can be employed in place of crankcase
drainings, but usually it will be unavailable for flame-thrower use.
b. Preparation of ingredients. Before mixing blends, the following steps
should be taken:
(1) Gasoline, diesel oils, and fuel oils. These fuel materials should be
allowed to stand quietly for at least 30 minutes to permit any small quantity
of water present to settle to the bottom. When transferring the fuel to
another container, remove the fuel carefully so that no water is remixed
with it.
(2) Crankcase drainings. If possible, crankcase drainings should be
allowed to stand quietly in a container for at least 1 day. When pouring, take
care to prevent the transfer of any of the sludge which may have settled in
the bottom of the container.
c. Equipment. An open-head 55-gallon or 42-gallon drum and an
improvised wooden mixing paddle are used. The paddle should be
approximately 5 feet long, 2 inches wide, and 1 inch thick. A metal paddle
should not be provided because of the danger of striking a spark from the
drum. Five-gallon cans may also be furnished for measuring and
transferring ingredients. Clean, unrusted, steel storage drums should be at
hand. They should be at least 16-gage to have sufficient strength to
withstand the internal vapor pressure of the fuel.
d. Stirring. All the ingredients should be stirred in the drum with the
paddle until they appear to form a uniform mixture. This should require
approximately 2 minutes.
Page 82
e. Crankcase-draining blends. If crankcase drainings are used as an
ingredient (Par 36b), it is preferable to allow the prepared mixture to settle
for 24 hours after stirring, because the gasoline in the mixture may cause
additional sludge to be deposited. Even after this settling period, it is
recommended that the mixture be poured through cheesecloth or some
similar fabric before the flame thrower is filled. Crankcase-draining blends
should be allowed to stay in the flame thrower only long enough for
completion of a mission, because additional sludge which may form from
standing will clog the weapon.
f. Transferring. The mixture should be transferred either directly into the
flame-thrower fuel tanks (Pars 37 through 40) or into storage drums. (Par
35h)
g. Emergency mixing in fuel tanks. In an emergency, mixing can be done
in the flame-thrower fuel tanks by adding the ingredients in correct
proportions and then shaking or stirring.
h. Testing fuel. Before fuel is used on a mission, it should be tested, if
possible, by being fired from a flame thrower.
i. Storage. Fuels may be used immediately after preparation. If the blend
contains crankcase oils, the fuel should be fired as soon as practicable after
filling. Other liquid blends may be stored indefinitely until required for use.
For storage precautions see Paragraph 40. The storage drums also should be
kept tightly closed to prevent loss of gasoline through evaporation and to
prevent moisture from entering the fuel. If stored in the open, the drums
should be laid on their sides so that rain water will not collect adjacent to
the bungs. An unrusted and undamaged 16-gage or 18-gage drum has
sufficient strength to withstand the internal vapor pressure of the fuel.
37. FILLING BY POURING.
ingredient (Par 36b), it is preferable to allow the prepared mixture to settle
for 24 hours after stirring, because the gasoline in the mixture may cause
additional sludge to be deposited. Even after this settling period, it is
recommended that the mixture be poured through cheesecloth or some
similar fabric before the flame thrower is filled. Crankcase-draining blends
should be allowed to stay in the flame thrower only long enough for
completion of a mission, because additional sludge which may form from
standing will clog the weapon.
f. Transferring. The mixture should be transferred either directly into the
flame-thrower fuel tanks (Pars 37 through 40) or into storage drums. (Par
35h)
g. Emergency mixing in fuel tanks. In an emergency, mixing can be done
in the flame-thrower fuel tanks by adding the ingredients in correct
proportions and then shaking or stirring.
h. Testing fuel. Before fuel is used on a mission, it should be tested, if
possible, by being fired from a flame thrower.
i. Storage. Fuels may be used immediately after preparation. If the blend
contains crankcase oils, the fuel should be fired as soon as practicable after
filling. Other liquid blends may be stored indefinitely until required for use.
For storage precautions see Paragraph 40. The storage drums also should be
kept tightly closed to prevent loss of gasoline through evaporation and to
prevent moisture from entering the fuel. If stored in the open, the drums
should be laid on their sides so that rain water will not collect adjacent to
the bungs. An unrusted and undamaged 16-gage or 18-gage drum has
sufficient strength to withstand the internal vapor pressure of the fuel.
37. FILLING BY POURING.
Page 83
Fig 28. Filling fuel tanks by pouring. Any clean container may be used. A
funnel may be improvised.
(Fig 28) This method is the simplest and quickest for liquid fuel, but it may
be too slow for some thickened fuels. The procedure is as follows:
a. Stand the tank group on the ground or a platform. If the tank group is
not connected to the gun group, lock coupling plug in tank coupling. (Par
70)
b. Using a 1-3/4-inch wrench, unscrew the filling plug and the safety-
head plug.
c. Inspect interior of tanks to see if clean and free from foreign matter. If
not clean, flush with gasoline.
d. Using an improvised funnel, fill to within 2 inches of the top of both
plug openings. This allows sufficient void. The tanks will then contain
approximately 4 gallons of fuel.
funnel may be improvised.
(Fig 28) This method is the simplest and quickest for liquid fuel, but it may
be too slow for some thickened fuels. The procedure is as follows:
a. Stand the tank group on the ground or a platform. If the tank group is
not connected to the gun group, lock coupling plug in tank coupling. (Par
70)
b. Using a 1-3/4-inch wrench, unscrew the filling plug and the safety-
head plug.
c. Inspect interior of tanks to see if clean and free from foreign matter. If
not clean, flush with gasoline.
d. Using an improvised funnel, fill to within 2 inches of the top of both
plug openings. This allows sufficient void. The tanks will then contain
approximately 4 gallons of fuel.
Page 84
e. Wipe the fuel-tank plug seats and the plug threads with a clean, dry
cloth. (Fig 29) If plug has a tendency to freeze to seat, lubricate (Par 49 b)
before screwing in the filling and safety-head plug assemblies. Tighten with
wrench.
Fig 29. Wiping plug seat.
f. Wipe any spilled fuel from weapon.
38. FILLING BY FORCE PUMP.
A force pump, if available, may be installed with a short length of pipe in
the top opening of a drum of fuel for filling flame-thrower fuel tanks. Keep
working parts of pump clean.
39. FILLING BY BLOWING.
Thickened fuel may be readily forced into the fuel tanks of flame throwers
by the use of extremely low pressures of compressed air or nitrogen. Flame
cloth. (Fig 29) If plug has a tendency to freeze to seat, lubricate (Par 49 b)
before screwing in the filling and safety-head plug assemblies. Tighten with
wrench.
Fig 29. Wiping plug seat.
f. Wipe any spilled fuel from weapon.
38. FILLING BY FORCE PUMP.
A force pump, if available, may be installed with a short length of pipe in
the top opening of a drum of fuel for filling flame-thrower fuel tanks. Keep
working parts of pump clean.
39. FILLING BY BLOWING.
Thickened fuel may be readily forced into the fuel tanks of flame throwers
by the use of extremely low pressures of compressed air or nitrogen. Flame
Page 85
thrower fuel filling kit E6 or equivalent may be used. When equipment is
available, filling by blowing is more efficient for filling large numbers of
flame throwers with thickened fuel. Pouring or pumping are more time-
consuming, depending on the consistency of the gel. The consistency may
vary among batches even when the same proportion of thickener is used.
The amount of moisture in the fuel seems to cause this variation. The
precautions listed in Paragraph 40 should be observed.
Fig 30. Blowing thickened fuel into fuel tanks by use of cylinders of
compressed air or nitrogen.
a. Source of pressure. When the pressure in cylinders of compressed air
or nitrogen has fallen too low to be of further use in filling pressure tanks of
flame throwers, the remaining pressure may be used to blow fuel into fuel
tanks if the regulator valve can reduce pressure down to 20 pounds per
square inch. For precautions, see Paragraph 33. An air compressor or a hand
air pump (tire pump) may be used in place of a cylinder if the latter is not
available. Pressure of no more than 15 to 20 pounds per square inch should
be used on the fuel drums. Only a diaphragm-type regulator valve can be
available, filling by blowing is more efficient for filling large numbers of
flame throwers with thickened fuel. Pouring or pumping are more time-
consuming, depending on the consistency of the gel. The consistency may
vary among batches even when the same proportion of thickener is used.
The amount of moisture in the fuel seems to cause this variation. The
precautions listed in Paragraph 40 should be observed.
Fig 30. Blowing thickened fuel into fuel tanks by use of cylinders of
compressed air or nitrogen.
a. Source of pressure. When the pressure in cylinders of compressed air
or nitrogen has fallen too low to be of further use in filling pressure tanks of
flame throwers, the remaining pressure may be used to blow fuel into fuel
tanks if the regulator valve can reduce pressure down to 20 pounds per
square inch. For precautions, see Paragraph 33. An air compressor or a hand
air pump (tire pump) may be used in place of a cylinder if the latter is not
available. Pressure of no more than 15 to 20 pounds per square inch should
be used on the fuel drums. Only a diaphragm-type regulator valve can be
Page 86
used safely. This valve must be capable of regulating any pressure that may
be applied to it.
b. Drums. Clean, noncorroded, steel, 55-gallon drums should be used.
Drums of United States manufacture which meet requirements will be
stamped ICC-5 or ICC-5A, followed by three numbers in sequence, for
example, “14-55-44.” The number “14” indicates the gage of the metal;
“55” indicates the capacity in gallons; and “44” indicates the year of
manufacture. A steel drum of 14 gage, or heavier, is preferable, but lighter
drums (of 16 or 18 gage) may be used. Drums made of gages lighter than
18 gage (20-or 22-gage) must not be used. Drums should never be moved
while under pressure.
c. Connections. The source of pressure (see a above), the drum of fuel,
the fuel-filling line, the air hose, and other parts, are connected as shown in
Figure 30. Threaded adapters are used, as necessary, to fit lines to the drum.
All threaded connections should be made tight by the use of wrenches on
the joints. The drum and the pressure cylinder (if the latter is used) should
be laid on their sides on the ground or a platform. The opening of the drum
connected to the fuel-filling hose should be close to the ground or platform.
If tank group is filled without gun group, lock coupling plug (Par 70) in
tank coupling.
d. Procedure. To fill fuel tanks:
(1) Remove both the filling and safety-head plugs.
(2) Inspect interior of tanks to see if clean and free from foreign
matter. If not clean, flush with gasoline.
(3) Place end of fuel-filling hose in either one of the two fuel-tank plug
holes, using a nipple as a spout.
(4) Start air compressor or pump, or open the valve on the cylinder of
compressed air or nitrogen. Open regulator valve on filling line by turning
handle slowly until gage shows 15 to 20 pounds pressure, but no more.
Caution: “Cracking,” or opening a cylinder valve without using the proper
regulator valve (Par 39 a), may result in explosive pressure in the drums.
(5) Both tanks must be filled to within 2 inches of their tops. Close
valve on fuel-filling hose to halt flow at this level.
be applied to it.
b. Drums. Clean, noncorroded, steel, 55-gallon drums should be used.
Drums of United States manufacture which meet requirements will be
stamped ICC-5 or ICC-5A, followed by three numbers in sequence, for
example, “14-55-44.” The number “14” indicates the gage of the metal;
“55” indicates the capacity in gallons; and “44” indicates the year of
manufacture. A steel drum of 14 gage, or heavier, is preferable, but lighter
drums (of 16 or 18 gage) may be used. Drums made of gages lighter than
18 gage (20-or 22-gage) must not be used. Drums should never be moved
while under pressure.
c. Connections. The source of pressure (see a above), the drum of fuel,
the fuel-filling line, the air hose, and other parts, are connected as shown in
Figure 30. Threaded adapters are used, as necessary, to fit lines to the drum.
All threaded connections should be made tight by the use of wrenches on
the joints. The drum and the pressure cylinder (if the latter is used) should
be laid on their sides on the ground or a platform. The opening of the drum
connected to the fuel-filling hose should be close to the ground or platform.
If tank group is filled without gun group, lock coupling plug (Par 70) in
tank coupling.
d. Procedure. To fill fuel tanks:
(1) Remove both the filling and safety-head plugs.
(2) Inspect interior of tanks to see if clean and free from foreign
matter. If not clean, flush with gasoline.
(3) Place end of fuel-filling hose in either one of the two fuel-tank plug
holes, using a nipple as a spout.
(4) Start air compressor or pump, or open the valve on the cylinder of
compressed air or nitrogen. Open regulator valve on filling line by turning
handle slowly until gage shows 15 to 20 pounds pressure, but no more.
Caution: “Cracking,” or opening a cylinder valve without using the proper
regulator valve (Par 39 a), may result in explosive pressure in the drums.
(5) Both tanks must be filled to within 2 inches of their tops. Close
valve on fuel-filling hose to halt flow at this level.
Page 87
(6) If no additional flame throwers are to be filled, close pressure-
cylinder valve, or stop compressor or pump. Then, using wrench, slightly
loosen the air line at the drum, allowing pressure to bleed. When the
pressure in the drum has fallen to that of the atmosphere, close regulator
valve.
(7) Roll drum slightly and gently until fuel-filling hose is at top of
drum.
(8) If there are valves on each end of the fuel-filling hose, use wrench
to slightly loosen hose, allowing gradual escape of pressure. Stand away
from, and at the side of, the connection. Keep hose pointed away from other
personnel. When all pressure has been released, complete unscrewing of
hose.
(9) Wipe fuel-tank plug seats and the plug threads with a clean, dry
cloth. Then screw in filling plug and safety-head plug assemblies, applying
grease (Par 49 b) if plug tends to freeze to seat. Tighten with wrench. Wipe
any spilled fuel from weapon.
40. PRECAUTIONS WITH FUELS.
a. Flammability. All fuels used in flame throwers obviously are highly
flammable and must be handled, stored, and used with extreme care. Diesel
oil, fuel oil, and kerosene require the same care as does gasoline.
b. Indoor storage. When it becomes necessary to handle gasoline in a
room or building, the windows and doors should be open and care taken
that no unprotected flame which might ignite the fumes is in the vicinity.
The doors and windows should remain open for a sufficient length of time
afterward to allow any vaporized gasoline to escape.
c. Flames and sparks. The presence of open flames, heated stoves,
electrical tools and apparatus, and other equipment likely to cause sparks
must not be permitted. Even nails and metal cleats in shoes are a potential
hazard in the presence of combustible fumes.
d. Smoking. “No Smoking” signs must be posted in prominent places
about the premises and the rule against smoking must be strictly enforced.
e. Ventilation and cleaning. The buildings in which fuel is stored or used
must be well ventilated and thoroughly cleaned every day. No rubbish or
cylinder valve, or stop compressor or pump. Then, using wrench, slightly
loosen the air line at the drum, allowing pressure to bleed. When the
pressure in the drum has fallen to that of the atmosphere, close regulator
valve.
(7) Roll drum slightly and gently until fuel-filling hose is at top of
drum.
(8) If there are valves on each end of the fuel-filling hose, use wrench
to slightly loosen hose, allowing gradual escape of pressure. Stand away
from, and at the side of, the connection. Keep hose pointed away from other
personnel. When all pressure has been released, complete unscrewing of
hose.
(9) Wipe fuel-tank plug seats and the plug threads with a clean, dry
cloth. Then screw in filling plug and safety-head plug assemblies, applying
grease (Par 49 b) if plug tends to freeze to seat. Tighten with wrench. Wipe
any spilled fuel from weapon.
40. PRECAUTIONS WITH FUELS.
a. Flammability. All fuels used in flame throwers obviously are highly
flammable and must be handled, stored, and used with extreme care. Diesel
oil, fuel oil, and kerosene require the same care as does gasoline.
b. Indoor storage. When it becomes necessary to handle gasoline in a
room or building, the windows and doors should be open and care taken
that no unprotected flame which might ignite the fumes is in the vicinity.
The doors and windows should remain open for a sufficient length of time
afterward to allow any vaporized gasoline to escape.
c. Flames and sparks. The presence of open flames, heated stoves,
electrical tools and apparatus, and other equipment likely to cause sparks
must not be permitted. Even nails and metal cleats in shoes are a potential
hazard in the presence of combustible fumes.
d. Smoking. “No Smoking” signs must be posted in prominent places
about the premises and the rule against smoking must be strictly enforced.
e. Ventilation and cleaning. The buildings in which fuel is stored or used
must be well ventilated and thoroughly cleaned every day. No rubbish or
Page 88
other flammable material should be permitted to remain in or near such
buildings.
f. Spillage. Care should be taken that fuel is not spilled. Any spillage
should be removed promptly.
g. Safety cans. Safety cans should be used, if possible, for storing small
quantities of gasoline, as they have covers that must be forcibly held open
to remove or add gasoline.
h. Rags. Metal receptacles with metal lids should be provided for
discarded, oily, or gasoline-soaked rags. These rags must be disposed of
daily.
i. Electrical apparatus. Vaporproof incandescent electric lamps, switches,
and other appliances of approved type should be used. Open switches,
relays, and similar apparatus, or motors with commutators, must not be
used where gasoline fumes may be encountered.
j. Hose. Flexible metal, rubber, and rubber-metal hose should be
inspected regularly (at least four times a year) and discarded when
noticeably deteriorated.
k. Toxic fumes. Gasoline fumes are somewhat toxic and should not be
inhaled.
l. Leaks. Leaks must never be neglected, and the fact that gasoline is a
dangerous liquid must always be kept in mind. Inspections for leaks should
be made frequently, particularly at pipe and hose joints.
m. Fire extinguishers. Carbon tetrachloride, carbon dioxide, or foam-type
fire extinguishers should be provided and located where they will be
accessible in the event of fire. Sand, not water, should be thrown on burning
fuel if suitable extinguishers are not available.
n. Leaded gasoline. Gasoline often contains a poisonous lead compound.
Such gasoline, or fuel containing leaded gasoline, should not be allowed to
touch the body, especially the lips, eyes, open cuts, and sores.
buildings.
f. Spillage. Care should be taken that fuel is not spilled. Any spillage
should be removed promptly.
g. Safety cans. Safety cans should be used, if possible, for storing small
quantities of gasoline, as they have covers that must be forcibly held open
to remove or add gasoline.
h. Rags. Metal receptacles with metal lids should be provided for
discarded, oily, or gasoline-soaked rags. These rags must be disposed of
daily.
i. Electrical apparatus. Vaporproof incandescent electric lamps, switches,
and other appliances of approved type should be used. Open switches,
relays, and similar apparatus, or motors with commutators, must not be
used where gasoline fumes may be encountered.
j. Hose. Flexible metal, rubber, and rubber-metal hose should be
inspected regularly (at least four times a year) and discarded when
noticeably deteriorated.
k. Toxic fumes. Gasoline fumes are somewhat toxic and should not be
inhaled.
l. Leaks. Leaks must never be neglected, and the fact that gasoline is a
dangerous liquid must always be kept in mind. Inspections for leaks should
be made frequently, particularly at pipe and hose joints.
m. Fire extinguishers. Carbon tetrachloride, carbon dioxide, or foam-type
fire extinguishers should be provided and located where they will be
accessible in the event of fire. Sand, not water, should be thrown on burning
fuel if suitable extinguishers are not available.
n. Leaded gasoline. Gasoline often contains a poisonous lead compound.
Such gasoline, or fuel containing leaded gasoline, should not be allowed to
touch the body, especially the lips, eyes, open cuts, and sores.
Page 89
Section IX OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL
CONDITIONS
41. WET CONDITIONS.
The M2-2 flame thrower may be carried and fired successfully in the rain or
even after short immersion in water. After use when wet, it should be dried
to prevent rusting, cleaned, and lubricated. (Pars 49 and 55) Areas where
paint has worn off should be touched up with fresh paint. The weapon
should be stored in a dry place. Moisture must not be allowed to enter fuel,
ingredients of fuel, or containers of ignition cylinders.
42. DUST AND MUD.
Keep all possible dust, earth, and mud out of the flame thrower; particles
may interfere with the operation of spring case, valves, bearings, and
pressure regulator. Store weapons and auxiliary equipment in closed chests
and boxes when not in use. (Par 77) Clean before use. (Pars 51 and 52)
43. HEAT.
A hot climate or exposure to the sun makes the fuel thinner when in
containers. Thin fuel has shorter range; it is largely consumed in the air
before it reaches usual effective ranges. Where the climate is torrid, less
gasoline or other thinning agents should be used in a fuel blend than
normally. (Pars 34 through 36)
44. COLD.
Cold weather reduces total heat produced at target but seldom enough to
seriously lower value of a firing mission. Incendiary effects may be
decreased because materiel is less flammable when cold. The weapon may
be used at temperatures as low as minus 20 degrees Fahrenheit. To improve
ignition, use more gasoline in fuel than normally. (Pars 34 through 36)
45. WIND.
Flame throwers should not be fired into strong head winds or across strong
side winds. (Par 23)
CONDITIONS
41. WET CONDITIONS.
The M2-2 flame thrower may be carried and fired successfully in the rain or
even after short immersion in water. After use when wet, it should be dried
to prevent rusting, cleaned, and lubricated. (Pars 49 and 55) Areas where
paint has worn off should be touched up with fresh paint. The weapon
should be stored in a dry place. Moisture must not be allowed to enter fuel,
ingredients of fuel, or containers of ignition cylinders.
42. DUST AND MUD.
Keep all possible dust, earth, and mud out of the flame thrower; particles
may interfere with the operation of spring case, valves, bearings, and
pressure regulator. Store weapons and auxiliary equipment in closed chests
and boxes when not in use. (Par 77) Clean before use. (Pars 51 and 52)
43. HEAT.
A hot climate or exposure to the sun makes the fuel thinner when in
containers. Thin fuel has shorter range; it is largely consumed in the air
before it reaches usual effective ranges. Where the climate is torrid, less
gasoline or other thinning agents should be used in a fuel blend than
normally. (Pars 34 through 36)
44. COLD.
Cold weather reduces total heat produced at target but seldom enough to
seriously lower value of a firing mission. Incendiary effects may be
decreased because materiel is less flammable when cold. The weapon may
be used at temperatures as low as minus 20 degrees Fahrenheit. To improve
ignition, use more gasoline in fuel than normally. (Pars 34 through 36)
45. WIND.
Flame throwers should not be fired into strong head winds or across strong
side winds. (Par 23)
Page 90
Section X DEMOLITION
TO PREVENT ENEMY USE
46. DESTRUCTION PROCEDURE.
If circumstances should force abandonment of chemical warfare materiel in
the field, it is destroyed or rendered useless to prevent its use or study by
the enemy. The following methods are recommended:
a. Flame thrower. One or more small-arms bullets through the fuel tanks
will prevent any immediate use of the flame thrower. Additional rounds
may be put through the pressure tank. If the pressure tank is charged, the
pressure-tank valve should be opened for a few seconds, thus permitting the
contents to dissipate. This is necessary if rounds are to be fired point-blank.
The gun may be rendered useless by bending it over a hard object. A sledge
or ax will demolish valves and tubes. A fragmentation grenade will also
achieve demolition.
b. Filling and charging apparatus. The flexible tubing, gages, and valves
may be destroyed by blows with an ax, sledge, or other heavy instrument.
The large pressure cylinders are rendered useless by releasing the contents
and then destroying the valves by blows with an ax or sledge. Cylinders can
be stacked like cordwood in groups of five and demolished by the
detonation of four 1/2-pound blocks (2 pounds) of TNT in their midst. The
air compressor may be destroyed by a similar procedure.
c. Fuel. Burn.
d. Mixing apparatus. Containers and filling lines may be rendered useless
by ax or sledge blows, or by small-arms fire.
e. Thickener. Cans of thickener should be broken open. Contents should
be thrown into a fire or into a body of water.
f. Ignition cylinders. Burn to destroy. Personnel should stay several yards
from the fire because the cylinders ignite with a slight detonation.
TO PREVENT ENEMY USE
46. DESTRUCTION PROCEDURE.
If circumstances should force abandonment of chemical warfare materiel in
the field, it is destroyed or rendered useless to prevent its use or study by
the enemy. The following methods are recommended:
a. Flame thrower. One or more small-arms bullets through the fuel tanks
will prevent any immediate use of the flame thrower. Additional rounds
may be put through the pressure tank. If the pressure tank is charged, the
pressure-tank valve should be opened for a few seconds, thus permitting the
contents to dissipate. This is necessary if rounds are to be fired point-blank.
The gun may be rendered useless by bending it over a hard object. A sledge
or ax will demolish valves and tubes. A fragmentation grenade will also
achieve demolition.
b. Filling and charging apparatus. The flexible tubing, gages, and valves
may be destroyed by blows with an ax, sledge, or other heavy instrument.
The large pressure cylinders are rendered useless by releasing the contents
and then destroying the valves by blows with an ax or sledge. Cylinders can
be stacked like cordwood in groups of five and demolished by the
detonation of four 1/2-pound blocks (2 pounds) of TNT in their midst. The
air compressor may be destroyed by a similar procedure.
c. Fuel. Burn.
d. Mixing apparatus. Containers and filling lines may be rendered useless
by ax or sledge blows, or by small-arms fire.
e. Thickener. Cans of thickener should be broken open. Contents should
be thrown into a fire or into a body of water.
f. Ignition cylinders. Burn to destroy. Personnel should stay several yards
from the fire because the cylinders ignite with a slight detonation.
Page 91
PART THREE
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Section XI GENERAL
47. SCOPE.
Part Three contains information for the guidance of the personnel of the
using organizations responsible for the maintenance (1st and 2nd echelon)
of this equipment. It contains information needed for the performance of the
scheduled lubrication and preventive maintenance services as well as
descriptions of the major systems and units and their functions in relation to
other components of the equipment.
Section XII SPECIAL ORGANIZATIONAL
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
48. SERVICE KIT.
One service kit for portable flame thrower M2-2 will be furnished for each
six M2-2 portable flame throwers. The kit includes tools, equipment, and
spare parts for second echelon maintenance and for pressure-tank charging.
Adjustable wrenches may be included in place of the plain-end wrenches
listed. Numbers listed with items are Chemical Warfare Service stock
numbers. Approximate contents are as follows:
a. Tools.
1 Screwdriver, cabinet, 4-1/2-inch blade length, 3/16-inch blade
diameter, H22-50-13. (Fig 8)
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Section XI GENERAL
47. SCOPE.
Part Three contains information for the guidance of the personnel of the
using organizations responsible for the maintenance (1st and 2nd echelon)
of this equipment. It contains information needed for the performance of the
scheduled lubrication and preventive maintenance services as well as
descriptions of the major systems and units and their functions in relation to
other components of the equipment.
Section XII SPECIAL ORGANIZATIONAL
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
48. SERVICE KIT.
One service kit for portable flame thrower M2-2 will be furnished for each
six M2-2 portable flame throwers. The kit includes tools, equipment, and
spare parts for second echelon maintenance and for pressure-tank charging.
Adjustable wrenches may be included in place of the plain-end wrenches
listed. Numbers listed with items are Chemical Warfare Service stock
numbers. Approximate contents are as follows:
a. Tools.
1 Screwdriver, cabinet, 4-1/2-inch blade length, 3/16-inch blade
diameter, H22-50-13. (Fig 8)
Page 92
1 Screw driver, common, 6-inch blade length, 5/16-inch blade
diameter, H22-50-6. (Fig 8)
2 Wrenches, hex, 3/16 inch across flats (for 3/8-inch socket-head set
screws), H22-49-91.
2 Wrenches, hex, 1/8 inch across flats (for 1/4-inch socket-head set
screws), H22-49-12. (Fig 8)
1 Wrench, valve-adjusting, assembly A81-6-48. (Fig 8)
1 Wrench, heavy “S”, 1-3/8-inch and 1-1/2-inch openings, 12 inches
approx length, H22-49-113. (Fig 8)
1 Wrench, engineers’, double head, 3/4-inch and 7/8-inch openings,
9 inches approx length, H22-49-115. (Fig 8)
1 Wrench, heavy “S”, 1-3/8-inch and 1-3/4-inch openings, 12 inches
approx length, A81-6-49. (Fig 8)
1 Wrench, engineers’, single head, 1-1/8-inch opening, 10-1/2
inches approx length, H22-49-31. (Fig 8)
1 Wrench, adjustable, single end, 6 inches approx length (crescent-
type), H22-49-67. (Fig 8)
b. Accessories and spare parts.
1 Line, filling, pressure cylinder, assembly C81-3-4. (Fig 23)
1 Hose, flexible, assembly E81-3-6. (Fig 24)
2 Lines, charging, pressure cylinder, assembly B81-3-29. (Fig 23)
1 Tank and valve, pressure, assembly (less shaft and handle) B81-1-
374. (Fig 33)
1 Shaft, flexible, valve, assembly E81-1-470. (Fig 33)
1 Handle, valve, A81-1-473. (Fig 33)
1 Nut, machine-screw, hex, 5/16-inch, 24NF-2, H22-93-55. (Fig 33)
2 Case, spring, assemblies B81-1-444. (Fig 9)
2 Diaphragm, valve, assemblies A81-1-416. (Fig 9)
1 Hose, fuel, flame thrower, M1, assembly B81-1-498. (Fig 48)
diameter, H22-50-6. (Fig 8)
2 Wrenches, hex, 3/16 inch across flats (for 3/8-inch socket-head set
screws), H22-49-91.
2 Wrenches, hex, 1/8 inch across flats (for 1/4-inch socket-head set
screws), H22-49-12. (Fig 8)
1 Wrench, valve-adjusting, assembly A81-6-48. (Fig 8)
1 Wrench, heavy “S”, 1-3/8-inch and 1-1/2-inch openings, 12 inches
approx length, H22-49-113. (Fig 8)
1 Wrench, engineers’, double head, 3/4-inch and 7/8-inch openings,
9 inches approx length, H22-49-115. (Fig 8)
1 Wrench, heavy “S”, 1-3/8-inch and 1-3/4-inch openings, 12 inches
approx length, A81-6-49. (Fig 8)
1 Wrench, engineers’, single head, 1-1/8-inch opening, 10-1/2
inches approx length, H22-49-31. (Fig 8)
1 Wrench, adjustable, single end, 6 inches approx length (crescent-
type), H22-49-67. (Fig 8)
b. Accessories and spare parts.
1 Line, filling, pressure cylinder, assembly C81-3-4. (Fig 23)
1 Hose, flexible, assembly E81-3-6. (Fig 24)
2 Lines, charging, pressure cylinder, assembly B81-3-29. (Fig 23)
1 Tank and valve, pressure, assembly (less shaft and handle) B81-1-
374. (Fig 33)
1 Shaft, flexible, valve, assembly E81-1-470. (Fig 33)
1 Handle, valve, A81-1-473. (Fig 33)
1 Nut, machine-screw, hex, 5/16-inch, 24NF-2, H22-93-55. (Fig 33)
2 Case, spring, assemblies B81-1-444. (Fig 9)
2 Diaphragm, valve, assemblies A81-1-416. (Fig 9)
1 Hose, fuel, flame thrower, M1, assembly B81-1-498. (Fig 48)
Page 93
2 Plugs, coupling, E81-1-514. (Fig 7)
6 Heads, safety, R81-1-561. (Fig 39)
1 Gage, fuel tank testing, assembly E81-6-57. (This assembly
includes a plug drilled, tapped, and fitted with a 0-500-
pound pressure gage.)
3 Washers, coupling, A81-1-513. (Fig 9)
2 Cord, cotton, seine, No. 4 hard braided, mildewproof, O.D., (1/8-
inch diameter by 25-feet skeins), H100-4-5.
6 Bushings, pipe, head, 3/4 inch by 1/2 inch, (galvanized iron), H98-
5-93. (Fig 9)
1 Regulator, pressure, assembly B81-1-438. (Figs 33 and 37)
1 Compound, anti-seize, white lead base, (for threaded fittings) 1/4-
pound can, H99-3-12.
2 Gages, pressure cylinder testing, assembly B81-6-90. (Fig 32)
1 Catalog CW7-440114, Army Service Forces, “Portable Flame
Thrower M2-2.”
1 Technical Manual 3-376A, “Portable Flame Thrower M2-2.”
6 Heads, safety, R81-1-561. (Fig 39)
1 Gage, fuel tank testing, assembly E81-6-57. (This assembly
includes a plug drilled, tapped, and fitted with a 0-500-
pound pressure gage.)
3 Washers, coupling, A81-1-513. (Fig 9)
2 Cord, cotton, seine, No. 4 hard braided, mildewproof, O.D., (1/8-
inch diameter by 25-feet skeins), H100-4-5.
6 Bushings, pipe, head, 3/4 inch by 1/2 inch, (galvanized iron), H98-
5-93. (Fig 9)
1 Regulator, pressure, assembly B81-1-438. (Figs 33 and 37)
1 Compound, anti-seize, white lead base, (for threaded fittings) 1/4-
pound can, H99-3-12.
2 Gages, pressure cylinder testing, assembly B81-6-90. (Fig 32)
1 Catalog CW7-440114, Army Service Forces, “Portable Flame
Thrower M2-2.”
1 Technical Manual 3-376A, “Portable Flame Thrower M2-2.”
Page 94
Fig 31. Lubrication order.
To requisition a replacement Lubrication Order address Office of the Chief, Chemical Warfare
Service, Washington 25, D. C.
NOT TO BE REPRODUCED in whole or in part without permission of the Office of the Chief,
Chemical Warfare Service.
NO. 4001
———— KEY ————
LUBRICANTS INTERVALS
CG- GREASE, 1- AFTER EACH MISSION
GENERAL PURPOSE 6- AFTER SIX MISSIONS
NO. 1 (ABOVE + 32°F) OR MORE OFTEN
NO. O (BELOW + 32°F)
THIS ORDER IS TO BE FASTENED TO INSIDE LID OF FLAME THROWER
PACKING CHEST.
Copy of this Lubrication Order will remain with the equipment at all times; instructions contained
therein are mandatory and supersede all conflicting lubrication Instructions dated prior to 5 MAY
1944
By order of the Secretary of War:
G. C. Marshall, Chief of Staff.
Official:
J. A. Ulio,
Major General,
The Adjutant General.
To requisition a replacement Lubrication Order address Office of the Chief, Chemical Warfare
Service, Washington 25, D. C.
NOT TO BE REPRODUCED in whole or in part without permission of the Office of the Chief,
Chemical Warfare Service.
NO. 4001
———— KEY ————
LUBRICANTS INTERVALS
CG- GREASE, 1- AFTER EACH MISSION
GENERAL PURPOSE 6- AFTER SIX MISSIONS
NO. 1 (ABOVE + 32°F) OR MORE OFTEN
NO. O (BELOW + 32°F)
THIS ORDER IS TO BE FASTENED TO INSIDE LID OF FLAME THROWER
PACKING CHEST.
Copy of this Lubrication Order will remain with the equipment at all times; instructions contained
therein are mandatory and supersede all conflicting lubrication Instructions dated prior to 5 MAY
1944
By order of the Secretary of War:
G. C. Marshall, Chief of Staff.
Official:
J. A. Ulio,
Major General,
The Adjutant General.
Page 95
Section XIII LUBRICATION
49. LUBRICATION.
a. Gun group. War Department Lubrication Order No. 4001 (Fig 31)
shows the parts which require lubrication, the lubricants, and the intervals.
(1) Lubricants. Grease, general purpose, No. 1 is used, except for
temperatures below freezing, when grease, general purpose. No. 0 is used.
The bearing surfaces should be lightly coated with the grease.
(2) Frequency of lubrication. The surfaces of the ignition-head body
which touch the spring case should be lubricated after each use of the
weapon. Other parts are lubricated after six firing missions, six training
sessions, or oftener. All should be thoroughly cleaned (Pars 52, 55, and 56)
with gasoline, dry cleaning solvent, or other solvent, then dried before
lubrication. If the gun is disassembled for any other reason, it should be
lubricated before reassembly.
(3) Records. To ascertain when six missions have been fired, a record
of firing (Par 2) should be kept with each flame thrower.
b. Tank group. The tank group ordinarily requires no lubrication.
However, it may under the following exceptional circumstances:
(1) If the tank group has been immersed in water for several hours, the
flexible shaft of the pressure valve may have lost its lubricant. If so, remove
the shaft (Par 66 b) and inspect. If lubricant is not present, as indicated by
difficulty of movement after removal, dip the shaft in solvent to clean and
then dip in warmed grease, general purpose, No. 1. Replace shaft in valve.
(2) If filling or safety-head plugs (Figs 39 and 40) tend to stick to fuel
tanks, apply grease, general purpose, No. 1 (No. 0 if below freezing
temperatures) before replacing plugs.
49. LUBRICATION.
a. Gun group. War Department Lubrication Order No. 4001 (Fig 31)
shows the parts which require lubrication, the lubricants, and the intervals.
(1) Lubricants. Grease, general purpose, No. 1 is used, except for
temperatures below freezing, when grease, general purpose. No. 0 is used.
The bearing surfaces should be lightly coated with the grease.
(2) Frequency of lubrication. The surfaces of the ignition-head body
which touch the spring case should be lubricated after each use of the
weapon. Other parts are lubricated after six firing missions, six training
sessions, or oftener. All should be thoroughly cleaned (Pars 52, 55, and 56)
with gasoline, dry cleaning solvent, or other solvent, then dried before
lubrication. If the gun is disassembled for any other reason, it should be
lubricated before reassembly.
(3) Records. To ascertain when six missions have been fired, a record
of firing (Par 2) should be kept with each flame thrower.
b. Tank group. The tank group ordinarily requires no lubrication.
However, it may under the following exceptional circumstances:
(1) If the tank group has been immersed in water for several hours, the
flexible shaft of the pressure valve may have lost its lubricant. If so, remove
the shaft (Par 66 b) and inspect. If lubricant is not present, as indicated by
difficulty of movement after removal, dip the shaft in solvent to clean and
then dip in warmed grease, general purpose, No. 1. Replace shaft in valve.
(2) If filling or safety-head plugs (Figs 39 and 40) tend to stick to fuel
tanks, apply grease, general purpose, No. 1 (No. 0 if below freezing
temperatures) before replacing plugs.
Page 96
Section XIV PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
SERVICES
50. GENERAL
Preventive maintenance services, as prescribed by Army Regulations, are a
function of using organization echelons of maintenance. These services
consist of:
a. Before, during, and after operation services performed by the firers and
assistants.
b. Scheduled services performed by organizational maintenance
personnel (service when filling and charging, and service after six firing
missions).
51. BEFORE-OPERATION SERVICE OF TANK GROUP.
The following services are to be performed before filling, charging, and
loading the flame thrower with pressure, fuel, and ignition cylinder:
a. Pressure-tank valve. Open and close pressure-tank valve to test for
ease of operation.
b. Threaded connections. Check all threaded connections for tightness,
using appropriate wrenches.
c. Tank coupling. Examine coupling for cleanliness and ease of
movement of lock and cams. (Par 70) Clean if necessary. If washer is
broken, replace, using screw driver to pry out.
d. Plugs. Check filling plug and safety-head plug for completeness of
parts (Par 69 a) and cleanliness of threads and seats. Clean, if necessary,
with cloth. If rod or rod and chain have broken off and fallen in tank, turn
tank upside down and remove. Remove deflector tube from head (using
hand, not wrench). Inspect to see if diaphragm is intact. If diaphragm is
ruptured, replace the safety head with an unbroken head. (Par 69 b, c)
Reassemble plug, head, and deflector tube in left fuel tank. (Fig 11) Tube
should face to rear and at a 45-degree angle to operator’s left shoulder. (Fig
SERVICES
50. GENERAL
Preventive maintenance services, as prescribed by Army Regulations, are a
function of using organization echelons of maintenance. These services
consist of:
a. Before, during, and after operation services performed by the firers and
assistants.
b. Scheduled services performed by organizational maintenance
personnel (service when filling and charging, and service after six firing
missions).
51. BEFORE-OPERATION SERVICE OF TANK GROUP.
The following services are to be performed before filling, charging, and
loading the flame thrower with pressure, fuel, and ignition cylinder:
a. Pressure-tank valve. Open and close pressure-tank valve to test for
ease of operation.
b. Threaded connections. Check all threaded connections for tightness,
using appropriate wrenches.
c. Tank coupling. Examine coupling for cleanliness and ease of
movement of lock and cams. (Par 70) Clean if necessary. If washer is
broken, replace, using screw driver to pry out.
d. Plugs. Check filling plug and safety-head plug for completeness of
parts (Par 69 a) and cleanliness of threads and seats. Clean, if necessary,
with cloth. If rod or rod and chain have broken off and fallen in tank, turn
tank upside down and remove. Remove deflector tube from head (using
hand, not wrench). Inspect to see if diaphragm is intact. If diaphragm is
ruptured, replace the safety head with an unbroken head. (Par 69 b, c)
Reassemble plug, head, and deflector tube in left fuel tank. (Fig 11) Tube
should face to rear and at a 45-degree angle to operator’s left shoulder. (Fig
Page 97
18) Screw in deflector tube by hand; do not use wrench on deflector tube.
Tighten lock nut with wrench.
e. Pressure-tank clamp. The clamp should hold the pressure tank tightly
in place. If tank is loose, a wooden splint or wedge under the clamp may be
used as a temporary expedient.
f. Carrier-frame bolts. Check tightness. Use wrench.
g. Carrier. (Par 71) Examine all canvas, webbing, and cord for signs of
mildew, rot, or wear. Replace defective parts. Move flame thrower to dryer
storage if mildew occurs.
h. Cord (lashing). Check for tightness. If necessary, make tighter and use
secure, slip-proof knots. When the tank group is filled with fuel and
adjusted on the firer, its weight should be carried chiefly by the canvas and
webbing, not by the metal frame.
i. Shoulder and body straps. Adjust straps to fit firer. (Pars 19 and 71) A
loose tank group can cause discomfort or injury when the wearer changes
positions while on a mission. Check presence and condition of the two pins
and two cotter pins which hold shoulder straps to steel support. Check
fasteners.
52. BEFORE-OPERATION SERVICE OF GUN GROUP.
The following services are to be performed before filling, charging, and
loading with pressure, fuel, and ignition cylinder:
a. Hose nipple, tank end. Examine to be sure nipple is clean and not
badly nicked. If badly nicked, the nipple may not make a tight seal at the
tank coupling. A leak and loss of pressure may result. See Paragraph 73 d
for repair of the nipple.
b. Fuel hose. Examine surface of hose for cracks or other signs of
deterioration. Special attention should be paid to portions adjacent to the
gun and tank coupling, which are subjected to severe flexing. If hose is
defective, replace. (Par 73 b, c) Do not patch.
c. Hose nipple, gun end. Check tightness of threaded connection between
hose and fuel-valve body, using hand or very light wrench pressure.
Tighten lock nut with wrench.
e. Pressure-tank clamp. The clamp should hold the pressure tank tightly
in place. If tank is loose, a wooden splint or wedge under the clamp may be
used as a temporary expedient.
f. Carrier-frame bolts. Check tightness. Use wrench.
g. Carrier. (Par 71) Examine all canvas, webbing, and cord for signs of
mildew, rot, or wear. Replace defective parts. Move flame thrower to dryer
storage if mildew occurs.
h. Cord (lashing). Check for tightness. If necessary, make tighter and use
secure, slip-proof knots. When the tank group is filled with fuel and
adjusted on the firer, its weight should be carried chiefly by the canvas and
webbing, not by the metal frame.
i. Shoulder and body straps. Adjust straps to fit firer. (Pars 19 and 71) A
loose tank group can cause discomfort or injury when the wearer changes
positions while on a mission. Check presence and condition of the two pins
and two cotter pins which hold shoulder straps to steel support. Check
fasteners.
52. BEFORE-OPERATION SERVICE OF GUN GROUP.
The following services are to be performed before filling, charging, and
loading with pressure, fuel, and ignition cylinder:
a. Hose nipple, tank end. Examine to be sure nipple is clean and not
badly nicked. If badly nicked, the nipple may not make a tight seal at the
tank coupling. A leak and loss of pressure may result. See Paragraph 73 d
for repair of the nipple.
b. Fuel hose. Examine surface of hose for cracks or other signs of
deterioration. Special attention should be paid to portions adjacent to the
gun and tank coupling, which are subjected to severe flexing. If hose is
defective, replace. (Par 73 b, c) Do not patch.
c. Hose nipple, gun end. Check tightness of threaded connection between
hose and fuel-valve body, using hand or very light wrench pressure.
Page 98
d. Shield. Remove ignition shield. Check cleanliness of threads on shield
and on ignition-head body. If not clean, use cloth. When reassembling (Par
18 c), shield should turn freely until it locks in correct position.
e. Valve lever and needle.
(1) There should be some play in the valve lever. To test, remove
ignition shield. Compress grip safety and valve lever slowly, observing the
motion of the valve needle. The valve lever should move approximately
1/16 inch before the needle begins to move.
(2) Valve needle should be seated firmly in the barrel nozzle. After the
valve lever is pulled back and released, no play should occur in the needle.
For adjustment of needle, see Paragraph 75 d.
f. Screws. Use screw driver to test tightness of all screws.
g. Spring retainer and plug. Check tightness of spring retainer and plug
(Fig 47) by using hand or very light wrench pressure.
h. Ignition head. All exposed surfaces of the shield, nozzle, needle, and
other parts of the ignition head, or adjacent to it, should be clean. If not, use
cloth.
i. Atomizer hole. With the fuel valve held fully open, insert a fine wire in
the atomizer hole of the nozzle to clean the hole. Then use cloth-wrapped
splint to remove from the inside of the nozzle any foreign matter pushed
through the atomizer hole. If such matter is not removed, it may interfere
with the closing of the fuel valve needle at the nozzle. Repeat procedure in
e (2) above.
j. Spring case. Spring case should turn freely on ignition head. If it does
not, clean any grease or dirt from, surfaces with cloth and relubricate. (Par
49)
k. Trigger. Pull trigger once or twice to find whether it operates easily
and whether it returns to position. If not, clean and lubricate trigger. (Par
49) Check condition of trigger spring.
l. Trigger rod. Check position of the trigger rod when trigger is pulled
back all the way as when firing. The rod should extend approximately 1/16
inch beyond the end of the lug in the ignition head. If it does not, bend the
rod slightly, reverse position of bearing, or replace worn parts.
and on ignition-head body. If not clean, use cloth. When reassembling (Par
18 c), shield should turn freely until it locks in correct position.
e. Valve lever and needle.
(1) There should be some play in the valve lever. To test, remove
ignition shield. Compress grip safety and valve lever slowly, observing the
motion of the valve needle. The valve lever should move approximately
1/16 inch before the needle begins to move.
(2) Valve needle should be seated firmly in the barrel nozzle. After the
valve lever is pulled back and released, no play should occur in the needle.
For adjustment of needle, see Paragraph 75 d.
f. Screws. Use screw driver to test tightness of all screws.
g. Spring retainer and plug. Check tightness of spring retainer and plug
(Fig 47) by using hand or very light wrench pressure.
h. Ignition head. All exposed surfaces of the shield, nozzle, needle, and
other parts of the ignition head, or adjacent to it, should be clean. If not, use
cloth.
i. Atomizer hole. With the fuel valve held fully open, insert a fine wire in
the atomizer hole of the nozzle to clean the hole. Then use cloth-wrapped
splint to remove from the inside of the nozzle any foreign matter pushed
through the atomizer hole. If such matter is not removed, it may interfere
with the closing of the fuel valve needle at the nozzle. Repeat procedure in
e (2) above.
j. Spring case. Spring case should turn freely on ignition head. If it does
not, clean any grease or dirt from, surfaces with cloth and relubricate. (Par
49)
k. Trigger. Pull trigger once or twice to find whether it operates easily
and whether it returns to position. If not, clean and lubricate trigger. (Par
49) Check condition of trigger spring.
l. Trigger rod. Check position of the trigger rod when trigger is pulled
back all the way as when firing. The rod should extend approximately 1/16
inch beyond the end of the lug in the ignition head. If it does not, bend the
rod slightly, reverse position of bearing, or replace worn parts.
Page 99
53. SERVICE WHEN FILLING AND CHARGING.
a. Inspection of fuel tanks. Just before filling and charging, remove plugs
(Par 69 b) and examine interior of fuel tanks to see whether they are clean
and free from foreign matter. If not clean, flush with gasoline until clean.
b. Fuel level. When filling (Pars 37 through 40), see that fuel reaches the
same level in both tanks. If leveling does not occur, the tank connector may
be clogged with foreign matter. If so, clean, as in a, above. After filling,
wipe plug seats with a cloth before replacing plugs. Wipe any spilled fuel
from weapon.
c. Pressure-tank valve. Before charging the tank group with air or
nitrogen, open and close the pressure-tank valve several times by hand to be
sure it operates freely. If it does not, adjust as described in Paragraph 66 d.
Fig 32. Testing pressure tank and valve, using 0-3,000-pound testing
gage from service kit.
a. Inspection of fuel tanks. Just before filling and charging, remove plugs
(Par 69 b) and examine interior of fuel tanks to see whether they are clean
and free from foreign matter. If not clean, flush with gasoline until clean.
b. Fuel level. When filling (Pars 37 through 40), see that fuel reaches the
same level in both tanks. If leveling does not occur, the tank connector may
be clogged with foreign matter. If so, clean, as in a, above. After filling,
wipe plug seats with a cloth before replacing plugs. Wipe any spilled fuel
from weapon.
c. Pressure-tank valve. Before charging the tank group with air or
nitrogen, open and close the pressure-tank valve several times by hand to be
sure it operates freely. If it does not, adjust as described in Paragraph 66 d.
Fig 32. Testing pressure tank and valve, using 0-3,000-pound testing
gage from service kit.
Page 100
d. Testing for leaks in pressure system. After charging, and as few hours
as possible before a mission, use an 0-3,000-pound gage furnished in
service kit to test pressure. (Fig 32) To install gage, unscrew check-valve
cap and screw gage in check-valve body. If pressure has fallen below that to
which the tank was charged (Par 32), a leak is indicated. Remove gage,
replace check-valve cap, and check for leaks at joints between pressure tank
and valve and between tank valve and check valve. (A wrench should be
used to tighten cap on check-valve body so as to avoid producing an
additional leak.) Large leaks can be felt or heard. Small leaks can be
detected by coating joints with soap-and-water solution. Bubbles indicate
leaks. If a leak is revealed between pressure tank and pressure-tank valve,
or between check valve and pressure-tank valve, replace all three as a unit.
If tests do not show up the leak the tank may have been improperly charged.
It should be recharged and then retested.
54. SERVICE WHEN FIRING.
a. Failure to ignite. Pull trigger repeatedly. If ignition cylinder still fails to
ignite, dirt may be wedged in ignition head. Unscrew shield one-half turn.
Screw it back, rapping shield with the hand while turning. This should
dislodge foreign matter. Pull trigger again. Repeat procedure, if necessary.
b. Safety head “blows” (breaks). If safety head breaks, firing mission
cannot be carried out. On return, have head replaced. (Par 69) Follow test
procedure. (Par 56 b)
55. SERVICE AFTER FIRING.
a. Unloading. Remove ignition cylinder (Par 30), close pressure-tank
valve, and blow out remaining fuel and pressure. (Par 30)
b. Removal of equipment. Release the body straps, then the shoulder
straps. If prone, lie on side and allow tank group to roll off onto ground. If
standing or kneeling, take care that tank group does not drop on feet or legs.
c. Correcting or reporting. Correct any failures or difficulties or report
them as soon as possible to service or maintenance personnel.
d. Gun. Remove shield (Par 18) and clean interior of shield with cloth.
Clean holes in shield with wire or wooden splint. Clean external surfaces of
as possible before a mission, use an 0-3,000-pound gage furnished in
service kit to test pressure. (Fig 32) To install gage, unscrew check-valve
cap and screw gage in check-valve body. If pressure has fallen below that to
which the tank was charged (Par 32), a leak is indicated. Remove gage,
replace check-valve cap, and check for leaks at joints between pressure tank
and valve and between tank valve and check valve. (A wrench should be
used to tighten cap on check-valve body so as to avoid producing an
additional leak.) Large leaks can be felt or heard. Small leaks can be
detected by coating joints with soap-and-water solution. Bubbles indicate
leaks. If a leak is revealed between pressure tank and pressure-tank valve,
or between check valve and pressure-tank valve, replace all three as a unit.
If tests do not show up the leak the tank may have been improperly charged.
It should be recharged and then retested.
54. SERVICE WHEN FIRING.
a. Failure to ignite. Pull trigger repeatedly. If ignition cylinder still fails to
ignite, dirt may be wedged in ignition head. Unscrew shield one-half turn.
Screw it back, rapping shield with the hand while turning. This should
dislodge foreign matter. Pull trigger again. Repeat procedure, if necessary.
b. Safety head “blows” (breaks). If safety head breaks, firing mission
cannot be carried out. On return, have head replaced. (Par 69) Follow test
procedure. (Par 56 b)
55. SERVICE AFTER FIRING.
a. Unloading. Remove ignition cylinder (Par 30), close pressure-tank
valve, and blow out remaining fuel and pressure. (Par 30)
b. Removal of equipment. Release the body straps, then the shoulder
straps. If prone, lie on side and allow tank group to roll off onto ground. If
standing or kneeling, take care that tank group does not drop on feet or legs.
c. Correcting or reporting. Correct any failures or difficulties or report
them as soon as possible to service or maintenance personnel.
d. Gun. Remove shield (Par 18) and clean interior of shield with cloth.
Clean holes in shield with wire or wooden splint. Clean external surfaces of
Page 101
barrel, nozzle, needle, and other parts. Check cleanliness and adjustment of
needle. (Par 75 d) Check trigger for operation. Lubricate. (Par 49)
e. Fuel tanks and passages. Remove plugs (Par 69 b). Drain any
remaining fuel. Use gasoline to remove residues of thickened fuels before
they have a chance to harden and obstruct passages. If necessary, fill tanks
with gasoline and allow to stand for several hours, shaking occasionally.
Drain and repeat if necessary.
f. Safety head. Check head to see if it is ruptured; if it is, replace. (Par 69)
Follow test procedure. (Par 56 b)
g. Pressure-tank valve. If weapon is to be stored, open pressure-tank
valve and leave it open until next charging.
h. Carrier. Scrub, if necessary, with soap and water, or gasoline.
i. Exterior metal surfaces. Scrub exterior metal surfaces clean of fuel to
prevent fire hazard. Allow to dry before using again.
j. General inspection. Carefully examine all other parts, adjust as
necessary, and replace any which are damaged.
56. SERVICE AFTER SIX FIRING MISSIONS.
After the flame thrower has been used on six firing missions or the
equivalent in training work, experienced personnel should follow these
directions:
a. Before-operation and after-operation service. Follow the same
procedures as in Paragraphs 52, 53, and 55.
b. Test firing (or simulated firing).
(1) If tactical conditions permit test firing at a suitable test range (Par
15), fill the fuel tanks with fuel. (Pars 37 through 40)
(2) If test firing with fuel is impracticable, fill fuel tanks with clean
water. (Be sure to dry all parts after test.)
(3) Remove filling-plug assembly. (Par 69) Fish out the retainer rod
and chain by means of a bent wire.
(4) Do not unscrew the safety-head plug.
needle. (Par 75 d) Check trigger for operation. Lubricate. (Par 49)
e. Fuel tanks and passages. Remove plugs (Par 69 b). Drain any
remaining fuel. Use gasoline to remove residues of thickened fuels before
they have a chance to harden and obstruct passages. If necessary, fill tanks
with gasoline and allow to stand for several hours, shaking occasionally.
Drain and repeat if necessary.
f. Safety head. Check head to see if it is ruptured; if it is, replace. (Par 69)
Follow test procedure. (Par 56 b)
g. Pressure-tank valve. If weapon is to be stored, open pressure-tank
valve and leave it open until next charging.
h. Carrier. Scrub, if necessary, with soap and water, or gasoline.
i. Exterior metal surfaces. Scrub exterior metal surfaces clean of fuel to
prevent fire hazard. Allow to dry before using again.
j. General inspection. Carefully examine all other parts, adjust as
necessary, and replace any which are damaged.
56. SERVICE AFTER SIX FIRING MISSIONS.
After the flame thrower has been used on six firing missions or the
equivalent in training work, experienced personnel should follow these
directions:
a. Before-operation and after-operation service. Follow the same
procedures as in Paragraphs 52, 53, and 55.
b. Test firing (or simulated firing).
(1) If tactical conditions permit test firing at a suitable test range (Par
15), fill the fuel tanks with fuel. (Pars 37 through 40)
(2) If test firing with fuel is impracticable, fill fuel tanks with clean
water. (Be sure to dry all parts after test.)
(3) Remove filling-plug assembly. (Par 69) Fish out the retainer rod
and chain by means of a bent wire.
(4) Do not unscrew the safety-head plug.
Page 102
(5) Insert the testing plug with 0-to 500-pound pressure gage (plug and
gage are from service kit) in the filling-plug opening. Tighten testing plug
in seat with wrench.
(6) Fully charge pressure tank. (Par 32)
(7) If test firing with fuel, load ignition cylinder. (Par 18)
(8) Open pressure-tank valve and simultaneously observe pressure in
fuel tanks by reading gage. The gage indicates the pressure in both tanks. It
should be between 350 and 390 pounds per square inch.
(9) Read the gage at the expiration of not less than 5 minutes. The
tanks should have a pressure reading of not more than 390 pounds. If the
pressure continues to increase beyond 390 pounds and the safety head
blows, replace the safety head and the pressure regulator.
(10) Fire by operating controls (or simulate firing if tanks are filled
with water). The burst should last 3 seconds, during which time the pressure
should not drop below 260 pounds.
(11) If the pressure does not conform to the requirements stated in (8),
(9), and (10), adjust the pressure regulator upward or downward. (Par 67 d)
(12) While the above test firing is proceeding, check for leaks at all
joints and connections on the tank group. The pressure system should be
checked by painting the joints with soap-and-water solution and by looking
for bubbles which indicate leaks. For replacement of parts where pressure
leaks, see Paragraph 66. Fuel leaks may be seen without soap and water.
For repair of fuel leaks, see Paragraph 75 e. The nozzle should be observed
by removing the ignition shield. Nozzle leaks are corrected by cleaning,
adjusting needle (Par 75 d), or by regrinding. (Par 75 e) If this is not
successful, replace both needle and barrel as a unit.
c. Fuel valve. Discharge all pressure from the gun by operating the fuel
valve. Carefully remove the valve grip and grip support. (Par 74) Look for
signs of leakage at the valve diaphragm. If a leak is present, replace valve-
diaphragm assembly. (Pars 75 b and 75 c)
d. Valve grip. Disassemble the valve grip (Par 74) and lubricate. (Par 49)
e. Carrier. Tighten the carrier cord.
gage are from service kit) in the filling-plug opening. Tighten testing plug
in seat with wrench.
(6) Fully charge pressure tank. (Par 32)
(7) If test firing with fuel, load ignition cylinder. (Par 18)
(8) Open pressure-tank valve and simultaneously observe pressure in
fuel tanks by reading gage. The gage indicates the pressure in both tanks. It
should be between 350 and 390 pounds per square inch.
(9) Read the gage at the expiration of not less than 5 minutes. The
tanks should have a pressure reading of not more than 390 pounds. If the
pressure continues to increase beyond 390 pounds and the safety head
blows, replace the safety head and the pressure regulator.
(10) Fire by operating controls (or simulate firing if tanks are filled
with water). The burst should last 3 seconds, during which time the pressure
should not drop below 260 pounds.
(11) If the pressure does not conform to the requirements stated in (8),
(9), and (10), adjust the pressure regulator upward or downward. (Par 67 d)
(12) While the above test firing is proceeding, check for leaks at all
joints and connections on the tank group. The pressure system should be
checked by painting the joints with soap-and-water solution and by looking
for bubbles which indicate leaks. For replacement of parts where pressure
leaks, see Paragraph 66. Fuel leaks may be seen without soap and water.
For repair of fuel leaks, see Paragraph 75 e. The nozzle should be observed
by removing the ignition shield. Nozzle leaks are corrected by cleaning,
adjusting needle (Par 75 d), or by regrinding. (Par 75 e) If this is not
successful, replace both needle and barrel as a unit.
c. Fuel valve. Discharge all pressure from the gun by operating the fuel
valve. Carefully remove the valve grip and grip support. (Par 74) Look for
signs of leakage at the valve diaphragm. If a leak is present, replace valve-
diaphragm assembly. (Pars 75 b and 75 c)
d. Valve grip. Disassemble the valve grip (Par 74) and lubricate. (Par 49)
e. Carrier. Tighten the carrier cord.
Page 103
f. Gun interior. If thickened fuel has been fired, disassemble the gun. All
parts should be cleaned of accumulations of dried fuel. Lubricate (Par 49)
and reassemble. If liquid fuel has been fired, flush gun with clean gasoline.
Disassemble only enough to lubricate. Reassemble.
parts should be cleaned of accumulations of dried fuel. Lubricate (Par 49)
and reassemble. If liquid fuel has been fired, flush gun with clean gasoline.
Disassemble only enough to lubricate. Reassemble.
Page 104
Section XV
TROUBLE SHOOTING
57. PRECAUTIONS.
First, remove the ignition cylinder. Then, before disassembling, servicing,
or repairing parts which may be under pressure, be sure to release the
pressure. Remove fuel, when necessary.
58. FUEL LEAKS.
TROUBLE SHOOTING
57. PRECAUTIONS.
First, remove the ignition cylinder. Then, before disassembling, servicing,
or repairing parts which may be under pressure, be sure to release the
pressure. Remove fuel, when necessary.
58. FUEL LEAKS.
Page 105
Trouble Remedy
a. Defective or If leak is observed in valve grip, disassemble. (Par
damaged valve- 74) If diaphragm is torn, or damaged in any
diaphragm assembly. other way, remove and replace. (Par 75)
b. Defective Disconnect, using wrenches. If thread is stripped or
threaded connections badly damaged, replace the threaded part. If
on fuel lines. threads appear to be sound, clean them and
reconnect. If leak is between tank coupling and
tank connector or between hose and fuel-valve
body, apply anti-seize compound before
rescrewing. Tighten joint with wrenches.
c. Dirt or foreign Clean parts carefully with cloth before reassembling.
matter on seats or
threads.
d. Leak at nozzle. Adjust needle. (Par 75 d) If leak persists, either
replace needle and barrel as a unit or use lapping
compound on parts. Turn needle in seat until
parts make a tight connection when seated.
Remove lapping compound and reassemble.
e. Worn body of Replace fuel-hose assembly. (Par 73)
hose.
f. Leak at tank Remove and replace coupling washer if damaged.
coupling. (Par 70) If hose nipple, tank end, is damaged,
repair nipple (Par 73 d) or replace fuel-hose
assembly.
59. SAFETY HEAD “BLOWS” (BREAKS).
Trouble Remedy
a. Defective Replace with new safety head. (Par 69 b)
safety head.
b. Defective If replacement safety head also breaks, follow test
pressure procedure in Paragraph 56 b to determine whether
regulator. pressure regulator needs adjustment or is defective.
60. CARRIER UNCOMFORTABLE.
a. Defective or If leak is observed in valve grip, disassemble. (Par
damaged valve- 74) If diaphragm is torn, or damaged in any
diaphragm assembly. other way, remove and replace. (Par 75)
b. Defective Disconnect, using wrenches. If thread is stripped or
threaded connections badly damaged, replace the threaded part. If
on fuel lines. threads appear to be sound, clean them and
reconnect. If leak is between tank coupling and
tank connector or between hose and fuel-valve
body, apply anti-seize compound before
rescrewing. Tighten joint with wrenches.
c. Dirt or foreign Clean parts carefully with cloth before reassembling.
matter on seats or
threads.
d. Leak at nozzle. Adjust needle. (Par 75 d) If leak persists, either
replace needle and barrel as a unit or use lapping
compound on parts. Turn needle in seat until
parts make a tight connection when seated.
Remove lapping compound and reassemble.
e. Worn body of Replace fuel-hose assembly. (Par 73)
hose.
f. Leak at tank Remove and replace coupling washer if damaged.
coupling. (Par 70) If hose nipple, tank end, is damaged,
repair nipple (Par 73 d) or replace fuel-hose
assembly.
59. SAFETY HEAD “BLOWS” (BREAKS).
Trouble Remedy
a. Defective Replace with new safety head. (Par 69 b)
safety head.
b. Defective If replacement safety head also breaks, follow test
pressure procedure in Paragraph 56 b to determine whether
regulator. pressure regulator needs adjustment or is defective.
60. CARRIER UNCOMFORTABLE.
Page 106
Trouble Remedy
a. Cord becomes Use only hard-braided seine cord furnished in service
loose or breaks. kit for replacements. Lace tightly as shown in
Figure 46, using slip-proof knots at ends.
b. Straps not Adjust straps to fit each new wearer. Tank group must
adjusted to fit be high on back and snug on body. (Pars 19 and
wearer. 71)
c. Carrier frame Cord is too loose. Tighten cord. Use slip-proof knots at
presses on wearer’s ends.
back.
61. SHORT RANGE.
Trouble Remedy
a. Stream of burning fuel Fuel valve is not fully open because of:
issues at an angle or in a (1) Faulty operation. Be sure to compress
very broad spray. controls all the way when firing. (Par 26)
(2) Improper adjustment or assembly of valve.
To correct, see Paragraphs 74 and 75.
b. Rapid drop of range Pressure-tank valve is not fully open. Open all
during a burst. the way. If this is not effective, test
pressure regulator. (Par 67 d)
c. Shorter range in each Pressure tank is not fully charged.
successive burst. (1) Before firing be sure tank is charged to at
least 1,700 pounds per square inch. (Par
32)
(2) Check for leaks to make sure pressure has
not decreased since charging. (Par 53 d)
d. Short range with longer Dried fuel or other foreign matter is in fuel
time of discharge than 8 to 9 lines. Disassemble and clean.
seconds.
62. FUEL-VALVE FAILURE.
Trouble Remedy
Valve fails to close (1) Work the grip safety to trip the valve lever.
when controls are
a. Cord becomes Use only hard-braided seine cord furnished in service
loose or breaks. kit for replacements. Lace tightly as shown in
Figure 46, using slip-proof knots at ends.
b. Straps not Adjust straps to fit each new wearer. Tank group must
adjusted to fit be high on back and snug on body. (Pars 19 and
wearer. 71)
c. Carrier frame Cord is too loose. Tighten cord. Use slip-proof knots at
presses on wearer’s ends.
back.
61. SHORT RANGE.
Trouble Remedy
a. Stream of burning fuel Fuel valve is not fully open because of:
issues at an angle or in a (1) Faulty operation. Be sure to compress
very broad spray. controls all the way when firing. (Par 26)
(2) Improper adjustment or assembly of valve.
To correct, see Paragraphs 74 and 75.
b. Rapid drop of range Pressure-tank valve is not fully open. Open all
during a burst. the way. If this is not effective, test
pressure regulator. (Par 67 d)
c. Shorter range in each Pressure tank is not fully charged.
successive burst. (1) Before firing be sure tank is charged to at
least 1,700 pounds per square inch. (Par
32)
(2) Check for leaks to make sure pressure has
not decreased since charging. (Par 53 d)
d. Short range with longer Dried fuel or other foreign matter is in fuel
time of discharge than 8 to 9 lines. Disassemble and clean.
seconds.
62. FUEL-VALVE FAILURE.
Trouble Remedy
Valve fails to close (1) Work the grip safety to trip the valve lever.
when controls are
Page 107
released. (2) Foreign matter may be in barrel, or barrel may be
dented. If dented, replace barrel and needle as a
unit. If not dented, disassemble and clean. (Pars 74
and 75)
63. FAILURE OF IGNITION CYLINDER TO IGNITE.
Trouble Remedy
a. Match in cylinder Pull trigger repeatedly. If cylinder does not ignite,
moves but incendiary remove cylinder (Par 30) and examine.
charge does not ignite. (1) If matches have been pushed flush with inner
surface of cylinder body, the cylinder is
defective. Destroy. (Par 30) Replace.
(2) If matches project 1/16 inch or more from
cylinder, ignition head is defective.
Disassemble ignition head (Par 76 b) and
examine. Replace parts as necessary. (Par 76
c)
b. Cylinder does not (1) Spring case is not free to rotate because of
rotate to bring new dirt. Clean and lubricate. (Par 49)
charge into position. (2) Cylinder is improperly loaded. (Par 18)
(3) Ignition cylinder binds on barrel because of
dirt or excessive warping of ignition
cylinders from heat of firing. Remove and
destroy (Par 30) ignition cylinder. Reload.
(4) Spring case is defective. Replace as a unit.
(Par 76 b, c)
c. Trigger does not 1) When on a mission, use fingers on trigger to
return to normal position pull back to normal position.
(with ignition cylinder in (2) If time permits, remove trigger rod. (Par 76 b)
place). Clean rod and hole in which rod slides.
Lubricate. (Par 49) Reassemble. (Par 76 c)
d. Lack of spring Trigger spring is off hook of trigger, off spring
tension at trigger. screw, or broken. Replace where necessary.
64. FAILURE OF FUEL TO IGNITE.
Trouble Remedy
dented. If dented, replace barrel and needle as a
unit. If not dented, disassemble and clean. (Pars 74
and 75)
63. FAILURE OF IGNITION CYLINDER TO IGNITE.
Trouble Remedy
a. Match in cylinder Pull trigger repeatedly. If cylinder does not ignite,
moves but incendiary remove cylinder (Par 30) and examine.
charge does not ignite. (1) If matches have been pushed flush with inner
surface of cylinder body, the cylinder is
defective. Destroy. (Par 30) Replace.
(2) If matches project 1/16 inch or more from
cylinder, ignition head is defective.
Disassemble ignition head (Par 76 b) and
examine. Replace parts as necessary. (Par 76
c)
b. Cylinder does not (1) Spring case is not free to rotate because of
rotate to bring new dirt. Clean and lubricate. (Par 49)
charge into position. (2) Cylinder is improperly loaded. (Par 18)
(3) Ignition cylinder binds on barrel because of
dirt or excessive warping of ignition
cylinders from heat of firing. Remove and
destroy (Par 30) ignition cylinder. Reload.
(4) Spring case is defective. Replace as a unit.
(Par 76 b, c)
c. Trigger does not 1) When on a mission, use fingers on trigger to
return to normal position pull back to normal position.
(with ignition cylinder in (2) If time permits, remove trigger rod. (Par 76 b)
place). Clean rod and hole in which rod slides.
Lubricate. (Par 49) Reassemble. (Par 76 c)
d. Lack of spring Trigger spring is off hook of trigger, off spring
tension at trigger. screw, or broken. Replace where necessary.
64. FAILURE OF FUEL TO IGNITE.
Trouble Remedy
Page 108
a. Atomizer Clean with fine wire. (Par 52 i)
hole clogged.
b. Fuel (1) At temperatures below minus 20 degrees Fahrenheit,
troubles at low ignition of any standard fuel is uncertain. Operation
temperature. at these temperatures should be avoided unless tests
of fuels by firing with flame throwers are first made.
(2) At temperatures above minus 20 degrees Fahrenheit,
no difficulty should be experienced with thickened
gasoline. When blended fuels are used, the ratio of
gasoline content should be increased as temperature
decreases.
c. Failure of See Paragraph 63.
ignition cylinder.
hole clogged.
b. Fuel (1) At temperatures below minus 20 degrees Fahrenheit,
troubles at low ignition of any standard fuel is uncertain. Operation
temperature. at these temperatures should be avoided unless tests
of fuels by firing with flame throwers are first made.
(2) At temperatures above minus 20 degrees Fahrenheit,
no difficulty should be experienced with thickened
gasoline. When blended fuels are used, the ratio of
gasoline content should be increased as temperature
decreases.
c. Failure of See Paragraph 63.
ignition cylinder.
Page 109
Section XVI
TANK GROUP
65. GENERAL.
The tank group stores fuel and pressure. The fuel is placed under pressure
when the pressure-tank valve is opened. The tank group is supported upon
the firer’s back and shoulders by the carrier.
66. PRESSURE TANK AND VALVE ASSEMBLY.
a. Description and functioning. The pressure tank and valve assembly
(Fig 33) includes:
(1) Pressure tank. The pressure tank is a lightweight, airplane-type
cylinder, able to withstand the great pressure which it contains. The tank is
charged with air or nitrogen at 1,700 to 2,100 pounds per square inch
pressure by use of auxiliary equipment as described in Paragraphs 31 and
32. This pressure stays in the pressure tank until the weapon is ready to be
fired. Opening of the pressure-tank valve releases air or nitrogen through
the pressure regulator to the fuel tanks. Oxygen or combustible gases are
never used in the tank because a violent explosion may result. The tank is
large in capacity to assure ample pressure, and hence full range, for the
entire load of fuel. The pressure-tank clamp (Fig 39), a steel-strap device
with hinge and toggle-type latch, holds the pressure tank in place on the
fuel tanks.
(2) Pressure-tank valve. (Figs 33 and 34) This valve is screwed into the
bottom of the pressure tank. The valve stem slides into the valve end of the
valve flexible shaft. When opened by means of the valve handle and valve
flexible shaft, the valve permits passage of compressed air or nitrogen
through tubes and the pressure regulator to the fuel tanks. The valve is of
the quick-opening, packless, diaphragm type.
(3) Pressure-valve handle and valve flexible shaft. (Figs 33 and 34)
The pressure-valve handle is held by a small nut on the end of the valve
flexible shaft, which in turn is connected to the pressure-tank valve by
TANK GROUP
65. GENERAL.
The tank group stores fuel and pressure. The fuel is placed under pressure
when the pressure-tank valve is opened. The tank group is supported upon
the firer’s back and shoulders by the carrier.
66. PRESSURE TANK AND VALVE ASSEMBLY.
a. Description and functioning. The pressure tank and valve assembly
(Fig 33) includes:
(1) Pressure tank. The pressure tank is a lightweight, airplane-type
cylinder, able to withstand the great pressure which it contains. The tank is
charged with air or nitrogen at 1,700 to 2,100 pounds per square inch
pressure by use of auxiliary equipment as described in Paragraphs 31 and
32. This pressure stays in the pressure tank until the weapon is ready to be
fired. Opening of the pressure-tank valve releases air or nitrogen through
the pressure regulator to the fuel tanks. Oxygen or combustible gases are
never used in the tank because a violent explosion may result. The tank is
large in capacity to assure ample pressure, and hence full range, for the
entire load of fuel. The pressure-tank clamp (Fig 39), a steel-strap device
with hinge and toggle-type latch, holds the pressure tank in place on the
fuel tanks.
(2) Pressure-tank valve. (Figs 33 and 34) This valve is screwed into the
bottom of the pressure tank. The valve stem slides into the valve end of the
valve flexible shaft. When opened by means of the valve handle and valve
flexible shaft, the valve permits passage of compressed air or nitrogen
through tubes and the pressure regulator to the fuel tanks. The valve is of
the quick-opening, packless, diaphragm type.
(3) Pressure-valve handle and valve flexible shaft. (Figs 33 and 34)
The pressure-valve handle is held by a small nut on the end of the valve
flexible shaft, which in turn is connected to the pressure-tank valve by
Page 110
means of the valve stem and a large hex nut. The handle and shaft extend to
the right of the tank group, enabling the firer to open and close the valve
without assistance when carrying the weapon. The handle slips over the end
of the shaft and is held to it by a nut. The shaft is held to one of the fuel
tanks by a clamp, nut, and bolt welded to the tank.
(4) Check valve. (Figs 33 through 35) The check valve has the same
function as the valve on a vehicular tire tube, but it is much heavier in
construction and different in design because the pressure in the flame
thrower is 50 times greater than that in an automobile tire tube. Connected
by threads to the pressure valve, the check valve permits compressed air or
nitrogen to enter the pressure tank during charging (Pars 31 and 32) but
prevents its escape when the outside source of pressure is removed. The cap
is removed from the check valve only for charging or testing.
b. Removal. (Fig 33) To prevent damage to threads, leaks, and loss of
pressure and range, remove pressure tank and valve assembly only when
necessary.
Fig 33. Pressure system disassembled, showing nomenclature and
Chemical Warfare Service stock numbers for requisitioning spare parts.
the right of the tank group, enabling the firer to open and close the valve
without assistance when carrying the weapon. The handle slips over the end
of the shaft and is held to it by a nut. The shaft is held to one of the fuel
tanks by a clamp, nut, and bolt welded to the tank.
(4) Check valve. (Figs 33 through 35) The check valve has the same
function as the valve on a vehicular tire tube, but it is much heavier in
construction and different in design because the pressure in the flame
thrower is 50 times greater than that in an automobile tire tube. Connected
by threads to the pressure valve, the check valve permits compressed air or
nitrogen to enter the pressure tank during charging (Pars 31 and 32) but
prevents its escape when the outside source of pressure is removed. The cap
is removed from the check valve only for charging or testing.
b. Removal. (Fig 33) To prevent damage to threads, leaks, and loss of
pressure and range, remove pressure tank and valve assembly only when
necessary.
Fig 33. Pressure system disassembled, showing nomenclature and
Chemical Warfare Service stock numbers for requisitioning spare parts.
Page 111
(1) Release of pressure. Be sure all pressure has been released from the
pressure system before disassembling or removing any part or assembly of
the pressure system. To release pressure, operate fuel valve (Par 26) and
hold open until pressure is exhausted. As an added precaution, personnel
should avoid facing the connections when disconnecting parts or
assemblies.
(2) Removal procedure. After release of all pressure:
(a) Loosen the clamp from the valve flexible shaft.
(b) Using wrench, unscrew the large hex nut which holds the
flexible shaft on the pressure-tank valve.
(c) Pull the valve flexible shaft and handle free of the valve.
(d) Using wrench, unscrew the flared tube nut on the regulator tube
adjacent to the pressure-tank valve.
(e) Open pressure-tank clamp (Fig 39) and swing clamp strap
outward.
(f) Remove the pressure tank together with the pressure-tank valve
and check valve.
(g) To remove valve handle, use the adjustable-end wrench to loosen
and remove nut from threaded outer end of valve flexible shaft. Slide out
the valve handle.
pressure system before disassembling or removing any part or assembly of
the pressure system. To release pressure, operate fuel valve (Par 26) and
hold open until pressure is exhausted. As an added precaution, personnel
should avoid facing the connections when disconnecting parts or
assemblies.
(2) Removal procedure. After release of all pressure:
(a) Loosen the clamp from the valve flexible shaft.
(b) Using wrench, unscrew the large hex nut which holds the
flexible shaft on the pressure-tank valve.
(c) Pull the valve flexible shaft and handle free of the valve.
(d) Using wrench, unscrew the flared tube nut on the regulator tube
adjacent to the pressure-tank valve.
(e) Open pressure-tank clamp (Fig 39) and swing clamp strap
outward.
(f) Remove the pressure tank together with the pressure-tank valve
and check valve.
(g) To remove valve handle, use the adjustable-end wrench to loosen
and remove nut from threaded outer end of valve flexible shaft. Slide out
the valve handle.
Page 112
Fig 34. Lower portion of pressure system, assembled.
Page 113
Fig 35. Check valve (cross section).
c. Installation. (Figs 33 and 39) To install:
(1) Insert pressure tank (with pressure-tank valve and check valve
mounted on the tank) through the pressure-tank clamp. Be sure to aline the
regulator tube, elbow, and pressure-tank valve threads carefully so that they
cannot be damaged when connecting.
(2) Close the pressure-tank clamp.
(3) Start the threaded connections by hand to be sure they are well
alined. Do not force. Use wrench for final tightening, but do not apply great
torque to the wrench.
(4) Insert the valve flexible shaft through small clamp into the
pressure-tank valve. Using wrench, tighten the large hex nut located
between shaft and valve.
(5) Tighten the clamp on the valve flexible shaft.
(6) Place pressure-valve handle on threaded end of the shaft. Place nut
on threaded end and tighten with adjustable-end wrench.
d. Adjustment. If valve handle cannot be turned by hand:
c. Installation. (Figs 33 and 39) To install:
(1) Insert pressure tank (with pressure-tank valve and check valve
mounted on the tank) through the pressure-tank clamp. Be sure to aline the
regulator tube, elbow, and pressure-tank valve threads carefully so that they
cannot be damaged when connecting.
(2) Close the pressure-tank clamp.
(3) Start the threaded connections by hand to be sure they are well
alined. Do not force. Use wrench for final tightening, but do not apply great
torque to the wrench.
(4) Insert the valve flexible shaft through small clamp into the
pressure-tank valve. Using wrench, tighten the large hex nut located
between shaft and valve.
(5) Tighten the clamp on the valve flexible shaft.
(6) Place pressure-valve handle on threaded end of the shaft. Place nut
on threaded end and tighten with adjustable-end wrench.
d. Adjustment. If valve handle cannot be turned by hand:
Page 114
(1) Remove flexible shaft and handle. Never apply a wrench to these
parts.
(2) Turn end of pressure-valve stem with wrench to open valve.
(3) If stem will not turn, replace the tank and valve.
(4) If stem turns, work it back and forth with wrench.
(5) Reconnect flexible shaft and handle.
(6) If handle does not turn easily, repeat the process until handle turns,
or replace tank and valve.
(7) Close valve before charging tank.
e. Maintenance.
(1) If either pressure tank, pressure-tank valve, or check valve are
damaged or defective, all three must be replaced as a unit. No attempt may
be made to repair any of these parts or their connections. If makeshift
repairs or improvised parts are devised, serious accidents can result because
of the extremely high pressures to which the equipment is subjected.
(2) Keep all threaded connections tightened. If a leak is suspected at
any threaded connection, follow procedure in Paragraph 53 d.
67. PRESSURE REGULATOR.
a. Description and functioning. The regulator automatically reduces the
variable pressure of air or nitrogen in the pressure tank to a constant
operating pressure of approximately 350 pounds per square inch in the fuel
tanks. The regulator is located at a protected position in the tank group of
the M2-2 portable flame thrower, where it is not readily subject to
tampering or damage from the outside. The regulator tube with fittings
connects the pressure-tank valve and pressure regulator. (Fig 33) Its outlet
is connected to the fuel tanks by the diffusion-pipe assembly. (Par 68 a)
Either of two interchangeable types of regulators is furnished: the spring
type (Figs 33, 36, and 37), and the dome type (Fig 38).
parts.
(2) Turn end of pressure-valve stem with wrench to open valve.
(3) If stem will not turn, replace the tank and valve.
(4) If stem turns, work it back and forth with wrench.
(5) Reconnect flexible shaft and handle.
(6) If handle does not turn easily, repeat the process until handle turns,
or replace tank and valve.
(7) Close valve before charging tank.
e. Maintenance.
(1) If either pressure tank, pressure-tank valve, or check valve are
damaged or defective, all three must be replaced as a unit. No attempt may
be made to repair any of these parts or their connections. If makeshift
repairs or improvised parts are devised, serious accidents can result because
of the extremely high pressures to which the equipment is subjected.
(2) Keep all threaded connections tightened. If a leak is suspected at
any threaded connection, follow procedure in Paragraph 53 d.
67. PRESSURE REGULATOR.
a. Description and functioning. The regulator automatically reduces the
variable pressure of air or nitrogen in the pressure tank to a constant
operating pressure of approximately 350 pounds per square inch in the fuel
tanks. The regulator is located at a protected position in the tank group of
the M2-2 portable flame thrower, where it is not readily subject to
tampering or damage from the outside. The regulator tube with fittings
connects the pressure-tank valve and pressure regulator. (Fig 33) Its outlet
is connected to the fuel tanks by the diffusion-pipe assembly. (Par 68 a)
Either of two interchangeable types of regulators is furnished: the spring
type (Figs 33, 36, and 37), and the dome type (Fig 38).
Page 115
Fig 36. Rear of tank group, with carrier removed to show pressure
regulator (spring-type) and connections.
b. Removal of pressure regulator. After release of all pressure:
(1) Remove carrier (Par 71 b), if necessary.
(2) Using wrench, unscrew the flared tube nuts and other fittings.
(3) Lift out the pressure regulator.
c. Installation of pressure regulator. Line up pressure regulator, regulator
tube, diffusion-pipe assembly, and fittings carefully so they will not be
damaged when threads are tightened. Start threads with the hands. Apply
regulator (spring-type) and connections.
b. Removal of pressure regulator. After release of all pressure:
(1) Remove carrier (Par 71 b), if necessary.
(2) Using wrench, unscrew the flared tube nuts and other fittings.
(3) Lift out the pressure regulator.
c. Installation of pressure regulator. Line up pressure regulator, regulator
tube, diffusion-pipe assembly, and fittings carefully so they will not be
damaged when threads are tightened. Start threads with the hands. Apply
Page 116
only moderate wrench pressure to complete tightening. Replace carrier or
carrier pack if either has been removed.
d. Adjustment of pressure regulator. The pressure regulator ordinarily
requires no attention other than checking and tightening connections with
the regulator tube and the diffusion-pipe assembly. If a defect in the
regulator is indicated by falling off of the range of the weapon or by
frequent breakage of the safety-head diaphragm (Par 56 b), the following
procedure should be carried out. (When using wrenches, do not apply
excessive force.)
(1) Remove the filling plug (Par 69 b) and ignition cylinder. (Par 30 a)
(2) Fill the fuel tanks with 4 gallons of water (or fuel).
(3) Connect the 0-to 500-pound fuel-tank testing gage, found in the
service kit, to the filling-plug hole. Tighten plug of gage with wrench.
(4) Charge the pressure tank to a pressure of 1,800 pounds per square
inch. (Pars 32 and 33)
(5) Open the pressure-tank valve.
(6) Read the pressure on the gage. If 350 to 390 pounds is indicated,
omit steps (7) through (10).
(7) To increase the pressure of a spring-type regulator:
(a) Pry off the protective cap.
(b) Turn a set-screw wrench clockwise in the adjusting screw and
read pressure on gage.
(8) To decrease the pressure of a spring-type regulator:
(a) Turn the set-screw wrench counterclockwise more than is
considered sufficient to effect the desired reduction.
(b) Turn the pressure-tank valve off.
(c) Relieve pressure in the fuel tanks by compressing the fuel valve
until the pressure is below that desired.
(d) Release the fuel valve.
carrier pack if either has been removed.
d. Adjustment of pressure regulator. The pressure regulator ordinarily
requires no attention other than checking and tightening connections with
the regulator tube and the diffusion-pipe assembly. If a defect in the
regulator is indicated by falling off of the range of the weapon or by
frequent breakage of the safety-head diaphragm (Par 56 b), the following
procedure should be carried out. (When using wrenches, do not apply
excessive force.)
(1) Remove the filling plug (Par 69 b) and ignition cylinder. (Par 30 a)
(2) Fill the fuel tanks with 4 gallons of water (or fuel).
(3) Connect the 0-to 500-pound fuel-tank testing gage, found in the
service kit, to the filling-plug hole. Tighten plug of gage with wrench.
(4) Charge the pressure tank to a pressure of 1,800 pounds per square
inch. (Pars 32 and 33)
(5) Open the pressure-tank valve.
(6) Read the pressure on the gage. If 350 to 390 pounds is indicated,
omit steps (7) through (10).
(7) To increase the pressure of a spring-type regulator:
(a) Pry off the protective cap.
(b) Turn a set-screw wrench clockwise in the adjusting screw and
read pressure on gage.
(8) To decrease the pressure of a spring-type regulator:
(a) Turn the set-screw wrench counterclockwise more than is
considered sufficient to effect the desired reduction.
(b) Turn the pressure-tank valve off.
(c) Relieve pressure in the fuel tanks by compressing the fuel valve
until the pressure is below that desired.
(d) Release the fuel valve.
Page 117
(e) Open the pressure-tank valve and allow the system to reach a
state of equilibrium, which occurs when the hissing sound ceases.
(f) Repeat the steps described above in (6) and (7).
(9) To increase the pressure of a dome-type regulator:
(a) Open needle valve No. 1 one full turn. (Fig 38)
(b) Open needle valve No. 2 one full turn. (There will be slight
leakage around the needle-valve thread.)
(c) Open needle valve No. 3 very slowly, watching pressure gage
closely. (As pressure builds up in fuel tanks there will be slight leakage
through needle valve No. 1.)
(d) When the pressure gage indicates 350 pounds, close needle valve
No. 3 tight.
(e) Close needle valve No. 2 tight.
(f) Close pressure-tank valve.
(g) When gage indicates zero, close needle valve No. 1 tight.
(10) To decrease the pressure of a dome-type regulator:
(a) Open needle valve No. 1 one full turn. (Fig 38)
(b) Open needle valve No. 3 very slightly, which will lower the
pressure.
(c) When 350 pounds is reached, close valve No. 3 tight.
state of equilibrium, which occurs when the hissing sound ceases.
(f) Repeat the steps described above in (6) and (7).
(9) To increase the pressure of a dome-type regulator:
(a) Open needle valve No. 1 one full turn. (Fig 38)
(b) Open needle valve No. 2 one full turn. (There will be slight
leakage around the needle-valve thread.)
(c) Open needle valve No. 3 very slowly, watching pressure gage
closely. (As pressure builds up in fuel tanks there will be slight leakage
through needle valve No. 1.)
(d) When the pressure gage indicates 350 pounds, close needle valve
No. 3 tight.
(e) Close needle valve No. 2 tight.
(f) Close pressure-tank valve.
(g) When gage indicates zero, close needle valve No. 1 tight.
(10) To decrease the pressure of a dome-type regulator:
(a) Open needle valve No. 1 one full turn. (Fig 38)
(b) Open needle valve No. 3 very slightly, which will lower the
pressure.
(c) When 350 pounds is reached, close valve No. 3 tight.
Page 118
Fig 37. Pressure regulator, spring-type.
Page 119
Fig 38. Pressure regulator, dome-type, showing needle valves and
wrenches.
(d) Close pressure-tank valve.
(e) When gage indicates zero, close needle valve No. 1 tight.
(11) Open pressure-tank valve and press the fuel valve to observe the
pressure with the weapon operating.
(12) After final adjustment:
(a) Close the pressure-tank valve.
(b) Open the fuel valve and release the pressure from the fuel tanks.
(c) Remove the pressure gage and plug from the fuel tank.
(d) Install filling plug.
(e) Tighten filling plug with wrench.
(f) If regulator is spring-type, replace its protective cap.
68. FUEL-TANK ASSEMBLY.
a. Description and functioning. (Figs 4, 5, and 39) The fuel-tank
assembly includes:
(1) Fuel tanks. Two alloy steel fuel tanks hold the fuel before it is
propelled to the target. They have a combined capacity, including void, of
4-1/2 gallons. A void of approximately 1/2 gallon is left in tanks when
filling to allow for expansion and to permit entry of the compressed
nitrogen or air. To speed filling and cleaning of the tanks, two openings are
provided on top of the fuel tanks. The openings are threaded to receive the
filling-plug assembly and the safety-head plug assembly, which are
interchangeable in the openings. Filling operations involve the use of
auxiliary equipment and are described in Paragraphs 34 through 40. The
carrier and the pressure system are supported on the fuel tanks.
wrenches.
(d) Close pressure-tank valve.
(e) When gage indicates zero, close needle valve No. 1 tight.
(11) Open pressure-tank valve and press the fuel valve to observe the
pressure with the weapon operating.
(12) After final adjustment:
(a) Close the pressure-tank valve.
(b) Open the fuel valve and release the pressure from the fuel tanks.
(c) Remove the pressure gage and plug from the fuel tank.
(d) Install filling plug.
(e) Tighten filling plug with wrench.
(f) If regulator is spring-type, replace its protective cap.
68. FUEL-TANK ASSEMBLY.
a. Description and functioning. (Figs 4, 5, and 39) The fuel-tank
assembly includes:
(1) Fuel tanks. Two alloy steel fuel tanks hold the fuel before it is
propelled to the target. They have a combined capacity, including void, of
4-1/2 gallons. A void of approximately 1/2 gallon is left in tanks when
filling to allow for expansion and to permit entry of the compressed
nitrogen or air. To speed filling and cleaning of the tanks, two openings are
provided on top of the fuel tanks. The openings are threaded to receive the
filling-plug assembly and the safety-head plug assembly, which are
interchangeable in the openings. Filling operations involve the use of
auxiliary equipment and are described in Paragraphs 34 through 40. The
carrier and the pressure system are supported on the fuel tanks.
Page 120
Fig 39. Fuel system of tank group and related parts disassembled,
showing nomenclature and Chemical Warfare Service stock numbers for
requisitioning spare parts.
(2) Tank connector. This open passageway between the fuel tanks
makes them, in effect, a single container. The location of the tank connector
and its large diameter permit easy flow of fuel and pressure between the
two tanks.
(3) Hose connector. The hose connector is the outlet for fuel from the
fuel tanks. It is located so that nearly all the fuel is propelled from the
weapon if firing positions are correct. (Par 24) One end is welded to an
opening in the tank connector. The other end is threaded into the tank
coupling.
(4) Frame clamp. This small metal clamp, with bolt, nut, and washer,
holds the hose connector to the carrier frame.
(5) Diffusion-pipe assembly. This T-shaped tubing carries compressed
air or nitrogen from the pressure regulator to each of the fuel tanks. A flared
tube connection and elbow connect the stem of the T to the pressure
regulator. The horizontal tubes of the T extend into the fuel tanks and are
welded to the fuel tank walls. Within the fuel tanks these tubes are
showing nomenclature and Chemical Warfare Service stock numbers for
requisitioning spare parts.
(2) Tank connector. This open passageway between the fuel tanks
makes them, in effect, a single container. The location of the tank connector
and its large diameter permit easy flow of fuel and pressure between the
two tanks.
(3) Hose connector. The hose connector is the outlet for fuel from the
fuel tanks. It is located so that nearly all the fuel is propelled from the
weapon if firing positions are correct. (Par 24) One end is welded to an
opening in the tank connector. The other end is threaded into the tank
coupling.
(4) Frame clamp. This small metal clamp, with bolt, nut, and washer,
holds the hose connector to the carrier frame.
(5) Diffusion-pipe assembly. This T-shaped tubing carries compressed
air or nitrogen from the pressure regulator to each of the fuel tanks. A flared
tube connection and elbow connect the stem of the T to the pressure
regulator. The horizontal tubes of the T extend into the fuel tanks and are
welded to the fuel tank walls. Within the fuel tanks these tubes are
Page 121
perforated with holes which permit ready escape of the compressed
nitrogen or air into the fuel tanks when the pressure-tank valve is open.
b. Removal and installation. The tank connector, hose connector,
diffusion-pipe assembly, and the two fuel tanks are welded together and
cannot be disassembled from each other. No attempt should be made to
remove any of these parts or assemblies.
c. Maintenance. Other than cleaning (Pars 51 d and 55 e), repainting, and
tightening of threaded joints, no repairs will be attempted by the first or
second echelon on the fuel tanks, tank and hose connectors, or diffusion-
pipe assembly. Emergency repairs may be made only by the third or fourth
echelon. No attempt should be made to weld or patch any part of the fuel
tanks.
69. FILLING AND SAFETY-HEAD PLUG ASSEMBLIES.
a. Description and functioning.
(1) Filling-plug assembly. (Fig 39) This assembly fits into the 1-3/8-
inch threaded opening at the top of either one of the fuel tanks. It permits
filling and cleaning of the tanks, and seals the opening when the tank is not
being filled or cleaned. The assembly includes the filling plug proper and a
plug-retainer assembly. The latter is a metal rod which hangs from the plug
on a metal chain. The rod and chain prevent accidental loss of the plug.
(2) Safety-head plug assembly. (Figs 39 and 40) This assembly is
screwed into the threaded opening on top of either fuel tank. It serves the
same functions as the filling-plug assembly and moreover protects the firer
and other personnel. It includes:
(a) Safety-head plug. This plug is similar to the filling plug except
for the threaded hole which receives the safety head.
(b) Safety head. This metal head screws into the safety-head plug. It
includes a soft metal diaphragm which bursts when the pressure in the fuel
tanks exceeds 500 pounds per square inch. It prevents the building up of
dangerous pressures in the fuel tanks.
nitrogen or air into the fuel tanks when the pressure-tank valve is open.
b. Removal and installation. The tank connector, hose connector,
diffusion-pipe assembly, and the two fuel tanks are welded together and
cannot be disassembled from each other. No attempt should be made to
remove any of these parts or assemblies.
c. Maintenance. Other than cleaning (Pars 51 d and 55 e), repainting, and
tightening of threaded joints, no repairs will be attempted by the first or
second echelon on the fuel tanks, tank and hose connectors, or diffusion-
pipe assembly. Emergency repairs may be made only by the third or fourth
echelon. No attempt should be made to weld or patch any part of the fuel
tanks.
69. FILLING AND SAFETY-HEAD PLUG ASSEMBLIES.
a. Description and functioning.
(1) Filling-plug assembly. (Fig 39) This assembly fits into the 1-3/8-
inch threaded opening at the top of either one of the fuel tanks. It permits
filling and cleaning of the tanks, and seals the opening when the tank is not
being filled or cleaned. The assembly includes the filling plug proper and a
plug-retainer assembly. The latter is a metal rod which hangs from the plug
on a metal chain. The rod and chain prevent accidental loss of the plug.
(2) Safety-head plug assembly. (Figs 39 and 40) This assembly is
screwed into the threaded opening on top of either fuel tank. It serves the
same functions as the filling-plug assembly and moreover protects the firer
and other personnel. It includes:
(a) Safety-head plug. This plug is similar to the filling plug except
for the threaded hole which receives the safety head.
(b) Safety head. This metal head screws into the safety-head plug. It
includes a soft metal diaphragm which bursts when the pressure in the fuel
tanks exceeds 500 pounds per square inch. It prevents the building up of
dangerous pressures in the fuel tanks.
Page 122
Fig 40. Safety-head plug assembly (cross section).
Page 123
Fig 41. Unscrewing safety head from safety-head plug, using wrench.
(c) Deflector tube. This short, curved piece of 1/8-inch pipe deflects
fuel and pressure away from the firer if the safety head bursts. A lock nut
holds the tube in position. (Par 12 j)
(d) Plug-retainer assembly. This assembly consists of a metal rod
and chain which hang from the plug and prevent accidental loss of the plug
when filling or inspecting.
b. Removal of plugs.
(c) Deflector tube. This short, curved piece of 1/8-inch pipe deflects
fuel and pressure away from the firer if the safety head bursts. A lock nut
holds the tube in position. (Par 12 j)
(d) Plug-retainer assembly. This assembly consists of a metal rod
and chain which hang from the plug and prevent accidental loss of the plug
when filling or inspecting.
b. Removal of plugs.
Page 124
(1) Before removing the filling plug, the safety-head plug, or an
unbroken safety head, operate the fuel valve until any pressure which may
have accumulated in the fuel tanks is eliminated. If the coupling plug is in
the tank coupling, very slightly loosen the threads of either the filling plug
or the safety-head plug, using the 1-3/4-inch wrench, to eliminate pressure
in the fuel tanks. Keep face and eyes away from the threads.
(2) The plug-retainer assemblies should not be lifted completely out of
the tanks unless required.
(3) If either the rod or the rod and chain breaks from one of the plugs
and falls into the tank, upend the tank group to permit removal of the parts.
(4) To replace burst safety head, unscrew lock nut and deflector tube.
(Fig 11) Using wrench (Fig 41), unscrew safety head. Never disassemble
the safety head.
c. Installation of plugs. The filling plug, safety-head plug, and safety
head are screwed in by hand and then tightened with wrenches. No
substitution will be made for the safety head, which is manufactured to
burst at the safe limit of pressure. The plug threads and seats should be
cleaned with a cloth (Fig 29) before installing plugs. Screw in deflector
tube, using hand pressure. The tube outlet should face to the rear and at a
45-degree angle to operator’s left shoulder. (Fig 18) Replace lock nut and
tighten with wrench. (Use wrench on lock nut, not on deflector tube.)
d. Maintenance of plugs. Replace safety head if damaged or blown.
Never repair safety head or use an improvised head.
70. TANK COUPLING.
a. Description and functioning. This quick-connecting coupling (Fig 42)
connects and locks the fuel hose or the coupling plug to the tank group. The
coupling cams, lock, and washer provide a secure and tight joint. The tank
coupling makes possible rapid replacement of emptied tank groups with
filled and charged tank groups in the field. No tools are needed for this
operation.
unbroken safety head, operate the fuel valve until any pressure which may
have accumulated in the fuel tanks is eliminated. If the coupling plug is in
the tank coupling, very slightly loosen the threads of either the filling plug
or the safety-head plug, using the 1-3/4-inch wrench, to eliminate pressure
in the fuel tanks. Keep face and eyes away from the threads.
(2) The plug-retainer assemblies should not be lifted completely out of
the tanks unless required.
(3) If either the rod or the rod and chain breaks from one of the plugs
and falls into the tank, upend the tank group to permit removal of the parts.
(4) To replace burst safety head, unscrew lock nut and deflector tube.
(Fig 11) Using wrench (Fig 41), unscrew safety head. Never disassemble
the safety head.
c. Installation of plugs. The filling plug, safety-head plug, and safety
head are screwed in by hand and then tightened with wrenches. No
substitution will be made for the safety head, which is manufactured to
burst at the safe limit of pressure. The plug threads and seats should be
cleaned with a cloth (Fig 29) before installing plugs. Screw in deflector
tube, using hand pressure. The tube outlet should face to the rear and at a
45-degree angle to operator’s left shoulder. (Fig 18) Replace lock nut and
tighten with wrench. (Use wrench on lock nut, not on deflector tube.)
d. Maintenance of plugs. Replace safety head if damaged or blown.
Never repair safety head or use an improvised head.
70. TANK COUPLING.
a. Description and functioning. This quick-connecting coupling (Fig 42)
connects and locks the fuel hose or the coupling plug to the tank group. The
coupling cams, lock, and washer provide a secure and tight joint. The tank
coupling makes possible rapid replacement of emptied tank groups with
filled and charged tank groups in the field. No tools are needed for this
operation.
Page 125
Fig 42. Tank coupling and end of fuel-hose assembly.
b. Removal.
(1) To remove the tank coupling from the hose connector, apply a
wrench and unscrew.
b. Removal.
(1) To remove the tank coupling from the hose connector, apply a
wrench and unscrew.
Page 126
Fig 43. Closing cams of tank coupling to connect gun and tank group.
This is done before locking. (See below.)
This is done before locking. (See below.)
Page 127
Fig 44. Closing lock of tank coupling to secure gun to tank group. This
also provides a fuel-tight seal.
(2) To disconnect the tank coupling from the fuel hose or the coupling
plug:
(a) Release pressure from fuel tanks by operating the fuel valve or
by opening very slightly the filling plug.
(b) Using hands, pivot the coupling lock back on the coupling body.
(c) Using hands, pivot the two coupling cams back on the coupling.
(d) Slide out the fuel hose or the tank coupling.
(e) If coupling washer is to be removed, pry out with a screw driver.
c. Installation of tank coupling. Proceed as follows:
(1) If coupling washer has been removed, replace.
(2) Insert coupling plug or hose nipple, tank end, in the coupling as far
as it will reach. Close the two cams. (Fig 43)
Fig 45. Coupling plug in place in tank coupling. This arrangement is used
when fuel tanks are brought back for filling with gun detached.
also provides a fuel-tight seal.
(2) To disconnect the tank coupling from the fuel hose or the coupling
plug:
(a) Release pressure from fuel tanks by operating the fuel valve or
by opening very slightly the filling plug.
(b) Using hands, pivot the coupling lock back on the coupling body.
(c) Using hands, pivot the two coupling cams back on the coupling.
(d) Slide out the fuel hose or the tank coupling.
(e) If coupling washer is to be removed, pry out with a screw driver.
c. Installation of tank coupling. Proceed as follows:
(1) If coupling washer has been removed, replace.
(2) Insert coupling plug or hose nipple, tank end, in the coupling as far
as it will reach. Close the two cams. (Fig 43)
Fig 45. Coupling plug in place in tank coupling. This arrangement is used
when fuel tanks are brought back for filling with gun detached.
Page 128
(3) Close the coupling lock (Fig 44), being sure to push it all the way,
until it covers the ends of both cams. (Figure 45 shows coupling lock
correctly locked on coupling plug.)
(4) If the tank coupling has been removed from the hose connector,
screw it on hand tight. Anti-seize compound should be applied lightly to the
threads to assure a tight joint. Use wrench to tighten the coupling until it is
in the position shown in Figure 34.
d. Maintenance of tank coupling. The coupling washer, made of synthetic
rubber, should be inspected frequently. If it is damaged or swollen, remove
it and replace. If the coupling leaks, inspect, and if necessary, remove and
replace the washer.
71. CARRIER.
a. Description and functioning. (Fig 46) The tank group is securely
carried on the firer’s back and chest by the carrier, which includes the metal
carrier frame, the canvas carrier pack, webbing straps, and cord, all of
which are parts of the tank group.
(1) Carrier frame. This lightweight, tubular-metal frame is bolted to
two pairs of brackets (upper and lower) on the fuel tanks. It is also bolted to
the hose connector by the frame clamp, which helps support the connector.
The frame is pierced by two parallel series of holes, through which the cord
(lashing) of the carrier is laced.
(2) Carrier pack. This is a sheet of heavy canvas, reinforced on the
tank side with strips of webbing. The smooth side of the carrier pack rests
against the firer’s back and cushions the back from contact with the metal
tanks. A series of eyelets is located on each side of the pack.
(3) Seine cord (lashing). The carrier pack is fastened to the carrier
frame by means of hard-braided cord which is laced through the eyelets in
the pack and the holes in the frame. The cord that comes on the flame
thrower stretches very little under load.
(4) Straps. The straps, made of wide cotton webbing, are adjustable to
fit the wearer. (Fig 18) They are provided with snap release, hook-and-eye,
and snap fasteners. The shoulder straps have quick-release fasteners for
rapid removal, if necessary, of the tank group from the firer. The upper ends
until it covers the ends of both cams. (Figure 45 shows coupling lock
correctly locked on coupling plug.)
(4) If the tank coupling has been removed from the hose connector,
screw it on hand tight. Anti-seize compound should be applied lightly to the
threads to assure a tight joint. Use wrench to tighten the coupling until it is
in the position shown in Figure 34.
d. Maintenance of tank coupling. The coupling washer, made of synthetic
rubber, should be inspected frequently. If it is damaged or swollen, remove
it and replace. If the coupling leaks, inspect, and if necessary, remove and
replace the washer.
71. CARRIER.
a. Description and functioning. (Fig 46) The tank group is securely
carried on the firer’s back and chest by the carrier, which includes the metal
carrier frame, the canvas carrier pack, webbing straps, and cord, all of
which are parts of the tank group.
(1) Carrier frame. This lightweight, tubular-metal frame is bolted to
two pairs of brackets (upper and lower) on the fuel tanks. It is also bolted to
the hose connector by the frame clamp, which helps support the connector.
The frame is pierced by two parallel series of holes, through which the cord
(lashing) of the carrier is laced.
(2) Carrier pack. This is a sheet of heavy canvas, reinforced on the
tank side with strips of webbing. The smooth side of the carrier pack rests
against the firer’s back and cushions the back from contact with the metal
tanks. A series of eyelets is located on each side of the pack.
(3) Seine cord (lashing). The carrier pack is fastened to the carrier
frame by means of hard-braided cord which is laced through the eyelets in
the pack and the holes in the frame. The cord that comes on the flame
thrower stretches very little under load.
(4) Straps. The straps, made of wide cotton webbing, are adjustable to
fit the wearer. (Fig 18) They are provided with snap release, hook-and-eye,
and snap fasteners. The shoulder straps have quick-release fasteners for
rapid removal, if necessary, of the tank group from the firer. The upper ends
Page 129
(steel loops) of the shoulder straps are secured by pins to the steel support
which connects the two fuel tanks. Each of the pins is held in position by a
split cotter pin, which is inserted through a hole in the pin and is then
spread. The lower ends of the shoulder straps snap onto metal loops at the
bottom of the carrier frame. The upper body straps are attached to metal
loops on each side of the carrier frame. The lower body straps are fastened
to one of the lower two pairs of eyelets of the carrier pack.
b. Removal of carrier.
(1) To remove carrier or carrier frame, use screw driver and adjustable-
end wrench to take off frame clamp, bolt, nut, and lock washer. (Fig 34)
Then remove two pairs of bolts, nuts, and lock washers which hold the
carrier frame to bottom and top of the fuel tanks. Lift off the carrier.
(2) To remove body straps, unsnap ends and lift out of holes. To
remove shoulder straps, unsnap lower ends and remove from holes. Pull out
cotter pins, then pins, from upper ends of shoulder straps, and lift out straps.
(3) To remove carrier pack, unknot and unlace cord.
c. Installation of carrier.
(1) To install carrier frame (or a complete carrier) place frame in
position adjacent to fuel tanks (Fig 46), insert bolts in holes, place lock
washers and nuts on bolts, and tighten with screw driver and wrench.
Replace frame clamp on fuel connector and frame. Insert bolt in holes,
place lock washer and nut on bolt. Tighten with screw driver and wrench.
(2) If carrier pack has been removed, use cord to relash. Lace tight and
use slip-proof knots. (Fig 46)
(3) To install straps, snap ends of body straps and lower ends of
shoulder straps into positions shown in Figure 46. Place upper ends (steel
loops) of shoulder straps in steel support between fuel tanks. Insert two pins
through any two of the holes in the support and through the shoulder strap
loops. Insert cotter pins in holes in pins and spread cotter pins to lock pins
in place.
d. Adjustment of carrier. Carrier must be carefully adjusted to fit the
individual firer so the load will not shift during sudden, rapid changes of
firer’s position. Adjustments are as follows:
which connects the two fuel tanks. Each of the pins is held in position by a
split cotter pin, which is inserted through a hole in the pin and is then
spread. The lower ends of the shoulder straps snap onto metal loops at the
bottom of the carrier frame. The upper body straps are attached to metal
loops on each side of the carrier frame. The lower body straps are fastened
to one of the lower two pairs of eyelets of the carrier pack.
b. Removal of carrier.
(1) To remove carrier or carrier frame, use screw driver and adjustable-
end wrench to take off frame clamp, bolt, nut, and lock washer. (Fig 34)
Then remove two pairs of bolts, nuts, and lock washers which hold the
carrier frame to bottom and top of the fuel tanks. Lift off the carrier.
(2) To remove body straps, unsnap ends and lift out of holes. To
remove shoulder straps, unsnap lower ends and remove from holes. Pull out
cotter pins, then pins, from upper ends of shoulder straps, and lift out straps.
(3) To remove carrier pack, unknot and unlace cord.
c. Installation of carrier.
(1) To install carrier frame (or a complete carrier) place frame in
position adjacent to fuel tanks (Fig 46), insert bolts in holes, place lock
washers and nuts on bolts, and tighten with screw driver and wrench.
Replace frame clamp on fuel connector and frame. Insert bolt in holes,
place lock washer and nut on bolt. Tighten with screw driver and wrench.
(2) If carrier pack has been removed, use cord to relash. Lace tight and
use slip-proof knots. (Fig 46)
(3) To install straps, snap ends of body straps and lower ends of
shoulder straps into positions shown in Figure 46. Place upper ends (steel
loops) of shoulder straps in steel support between fuel tanks. Insert two pins
through any two of the holes in the support and through the shoulder strap
loops. Insert cotter pins in holes in pins and spread cotter pins to lock pins
in place.
d. Adjustment of carrier. Carrier must be carefully adjusted to fit the
individual firer so the load will not shift during sudden, rapid changes of
firer’s position. Adjustments are as follows:
Page 130
(1) Cord and carrier pack. Cord must be tight at all times. The cord
furnished with the equipment has very little tendency to stretch. However,
pull cord tight when lacing and use slip-proof knots at ends. Tighten cord
periodically.
Fig 46. Carrier assembled on tank group.
(2) Straps. Adjust straps to fit each firer, moving slides on straps as
necessary. Straps must fit snugly to prevent shifting of load and to keep
furnished with the equipment has very little tendency to stretch. However,
pull cord tight when lacing and use slip-proof knots at ends. Tighten cord
periodically.
Fig 46. Carrier assembled on tank group.
(2) Straps. Adjust straps to fit each firer, moving slides on straps as
necessary. Straps must fit snugly to prevent shifting of load and to keep
Page 131
tank group high on firer’s back. Lower body straps may be fastened in
second pair from the bottom of carrier eyelets to conform to firer’s
physique. Pins, which hold top ends of shoulder straps to steel support
between the fuel tanks, may be moved to any two of the three holes so as to
provide the best balance in the load.
e. Maintenance of carrier. Keep carrier dry and clean. If flame thrower
becomes wet or muddy, clean and dry carrier thoroughly. Store in a dry
place. If rotted, mildewed, or damaged, replace affected parts. If cord frays
or breaks, use special seine cord from service kit as replacement.
second pair from the bottom of carrier eyelets to conform to firer’s
physique. Pins, which hold top ends of shoulder straps to steel support
between the fuel tanks, may be moved to any two of the three holes so as to
provide the best balance in the load.
e. Maintenance of carrier. Keep carrier dry and clean. If flame thrower
becomes wet or muddy, clean and dry carrier thoroughly. Store in a dry
place. If rotted, mildewed, or damaged, replace affected parts. If cord frays
or breaks, use special seine cord from service kit as replacement.
Page 132
Section XVII GUN GROUP
72. GENERAL
The gun group consists of the fuel-hose assembly and the gun. The gun
includes the fuel valve, which controls the ejection of fuel, and the ignition
head, which ignites the fuel.
73. FUEL-HOSE ASSEMBLY.
a. Description and functioning. (Fig 47) Hose, fuel, flame thrower, M1,
assembly, provides a flexible connection between the fuel tanks and the
gun.
(1) Hose. Made of synthetic rubber and reinforced with a cover of
metal wire and cotton braid, the hose resists the action of gasoline and oil,
and withstands a pressure of approximately 1,000 pounds per square inch.
Its inside diameter is 7/8 inch; its outside diameter is approximately 1-1/4
inches.
(2) Nipples. The hose nipple, tank end, connects the hose to the tank
coupling on the tank group. The hose nipple, gun end, is a threaded
connector between the other end of the hose and the fuel-valve body.
b. Removal of fuel-hose assembly. Remove the hose from the gun only
when necessary for maintenance. The threads in the fuel-valve body will be
damaged by frequent screwing and unscrewing of the hose because the
body is a lightweight aluminum casting. Fuel hose is replaced as a unit and
is not disassembled in the second echelon. To disconnect from tank group,
see Paragraph 70 b.
c. Installation of fuel-hose assembly.
(1) To install in tank group, see Paragraph 70 c.
(2) To install in gun, apply anti-seize compound (from service kit)
lightly to threads and screw hose in fuel-valve body by hand. Use wrench
only enough to make a secure connection.
d. Maintenance of fuel-hose assembly. If the hose nipple, tank end, is
badly nicked and does not provide a tight connection with a new coupling
72. GENERAL
The gun group consists of the fuel-hose assembly and the gun. The gun
includes the fuel valve, which controls the ejection of fuel, and the ignition
head, which ignites the fuel.
73. FUEL-HOSE ASSEMBLY.
a. Description and functioning. (Fig 47) Hose, fuel, flame thrower, M1,
assembly, provides a flexible connection between the fuel tanks and the
gun.
(1) Hose. Made of synthetic rubber and reinforced with a cover of
metal wire and cotton braid, the hose resists the action of gasoline and oil,
and withstands a pressure of approximately 1,000 pounds per square inch.
Its inside diameter is 7/8 inch; its outside diameter is approximately 1-1/4
inches.
(2) Nipples. The hose nipple, tank end, connects the hose to the tank
coupling on the tank group. The hose nipple, gun end, is a threaded
connector between the other end of the hose and the fuel-valve body.
b. Removal of fuel-hose assembly. Remove the hose from the gun only
when necessary for maintenance. The threads in the fuel-valve body will be
damaged by frequent screwing and unscrewing of the hose because the
body is a lightweight aluminum casting. Fuel hose is replaced as a unit and
is not disassembled in the second echelon. To disconnect from tank group,
see Paragraph 70 b.
c. Installation of fuel-hose assembly.
(1) To install in tank group, see Paragraph 70 c.
(2) To install in gun, apply anti-seize compound (from service kit)
lightly to threads and screw hose in fuel-valve body by hand. Use wrench
only enough to make a secure connection.
d. Maintenance of fuel-hose assembly. If the hose nipple, tank end, is
badly nicked and does not provide a tight connection with a new coupling
Page 133
washer (Par 70):
(1) File the end surface, being careful to keep the surface at a right
angle to the sides of the nipple.
(2) Couple hose nipple, tank end, to tank coupling. If coupling closes
very easily, indicating washer is not being compressed, replace the washer
and recouple. If coupling still closes too freely, the nipple has been filed too
short, and the fuel-hose assembly should be replaced as a unit.
74. VALVE GRIP.
a. Description and functioning. (Fig 47) The valve grip is part of the fuel
valve. It includes the controls and is held by the firer in his right hand to
support the gun group. Parts of the valve grip are:
(1) Left and right valve grips. A pistol-type grip is formed by two
aluminum housings designated as the left valve grip and the right valve
grip. The two parts are held together by four screws and four lock washers.
(2) Grip support. This aluminum housing is mounted above the left and
right valve grips and connected to them by two screws and lock washers.
(3) Valve lever. This control is made to fit the fingers and is mounted
in front of and between the two parts of the valve grip. A pin at the top of
the lever fits into holes in left and right valve grips and serves as a pivot,
governing the movement of the lever. When the lever and the grip safety are
compressed simultaneously by the operator, the valve is thereby opened and
fuel is ejected from the gun.
(4) Grip safety. This control is grasped by the hand simultaneously
with the valve lever. It is mounted back of and between left and right valve
grips. A pin at the base of the safety fits into holes in the left and right valve
grips and serves as a pivot in a manner similar to the pin on the valve lever.
The fuel cannot be discharged unless both the valve lever and the grip
safety are compressed simultaneously.
(5) Rocker arm. The rocker arm, a boat-shaped metal part, is mounted
near its center on a pin. It is held in contact with the valve lever by means
of a valve-grip spring and spring pin. At its top end, the rocker arm touches
the yoke shaft of the valve-diaphragm assembly. When the valve lever and
(1) File the end surface, being careful to keep the surface at a right
angle to the sides of the nipple.
(2) Couple hose nipple, tank end, to tank coupling. If coupling closes
very easily, indicating washer is not being compressed, replace the washer
and recouple. If coupling still closes too freely, the nipple has been filed too
short, and the fuel-hose assembly should be replaced as a unit.
74. VALVE GRIP.
a. Description and functioning. (Fig 47) The valve grip is part of the fuel
valve. It includes the controls and is held by the firer in his right hand to
support the gun group. Parts of the valve grip are:
(1) Left and right valve grips. A pistol-type grip is formed by two
aluminum housings designated as the left valve grip and the right valve
grip. The two parts are held together by four screws and four lock washers.
(2) Grip support. This aluminum housing is mounted above the left and
right valve grips and connected to them by two screws and lock washers.
(3) Valve lever. This control is made to fit the fingers and is mounted
in front of and between the two parts of the valve grip. A pin at the top of
the lever fits into holes in left and right valve grips and serves as a pivot,
governing the movement of the lever. When the lever and the grip safety are
compressed simultaneously by the operator, the valve is thereby opened and
fuel is ejected from the gun.
(4) Grip safety. This control is grasped by the hand simultaneously
with the valve lever. It is mounted back of and between left and right valve
grips. A pin at the base of the safety fits into holes in the left and right valve
grips and serves as a pivot in a manner similar to the pin on the valve lever.
The fuel cannot be discharged unless both the valve lever and the grip
safety are compressed simultaneously.
(5) Rocker arm. The rocker arm, a boat-shaped metal part, is mounted
near its center on a pin. It is held in contact with the valve lever by means
of a valve-grip spring and spring pin. At its top end, the rocker arm touches
the yoke shaft of the valve-diaphragm assembly. When the valve lever and
Page 134
the grip safety are compressed, the rocker arm pushes the valve diaphragm
assembly forward.
(6) Valve-grip spring. When the firer’s hand releases the valve grip, the
valve-grip spring forces the valve lever, the grip safety, and the rocker arm
back to their normal, nonoperating positions.
b. Removal of valve grip.
(1) Unscrew the four screws and lock washers that hold the grip
support to the valve body. Remove the valve grip as a unit.
Fig 47. Fuel valve (disassembled) and fuel hose, showing nomenclature
and Chemical Warfare Service stock numbers for requisitioning spare parts.
assembly forward.
(6) Valve-grip spring. When the firer’s hand releases the valve grip, the
valve-grip spring forces the valve lever, the grip safety, and the rocker arm
back to their normal, nonoperating positions.
b. Removal of valve grip.
(1) Unscrew the four screws and lock washers that hold the grip
support to the valve body. Remove the valve grip as a unit.
Fig 47. Fuel valve (disassembled) and fuel hose, showing nomenclature
and Chemical Warfare Service stock numbers for requisitioning spare parts.
Page 135
Fig 48. Location of parts in right valve grip before covering them with
left valve grip.
left valve grip.
Page 136
Fig 49. Using screw driver to push long end of valve-grip spring into
groove in grip safety.
(2) To disassemble valve grip, remove screws and lock washers from
the grip. Lift off the left valve grip, exposing contents of grip. Lift out the
following parts: valve-grip spring, rocker arm, grip safety, and valve lever.
c. Installing valve grip.
(1) Place grip safety, valve lever, and rocker arm in position in right
valve grip. (Fig 48) Be sure the shorter end of rocker arm is at the top. Place
grip spring over spring pin. Slip short end of grip spring in groove of rocker
arm. Place long end of grip spring on outside of grip safety.
(2) Put left valve grip in place and insert the two lower lock washers
and screws. Tighten the two screws enough to hold parts in place and still
leave space for moving long end of spring into the groove in grip safety.
Push spring into groove with a screw driver. (Fig 49)
(3) With spring in place, fully tighten the two screws with screw
driver.
groove in grip safety.
(2) To disassemble valve grip, remove screws and lock washers from
the grip. Lift off the left valve grip, exposing contents of grip. Lift out the
following parts: valve-grip spring, rocker arm, grip safety, and valve lever.
c. Installing valve grip.
(1) Place grip safety, valve lever, and rocker arm in position in right
valve grip. (Fig 48) Be sure the shorter end of rocker arm is at the top. Place
grip spring over spring pin. Slip short end of grip spring in groove of rocker
arm. Place long end of grip spring on outside of grip safety.
(2) Put left valve grip in place and insert the two lower lock washers
and screws. Tighten the two screws enough to hold parts in place and still
leave space for moving long end of spring into the groove in grip safety.
Push spring into groove with a screw driver. (Fig 49)
(3) With spring in place, fully tighten the two screws with screw
driver.
Page 137
(4) Place grip support in position, and insert the two upper lock
washers and screws. Tighten screws, using screw driver.
(5) Attach valve grip to valve body, using the four lock washers and
inserting the four screws through the grip support. Make sure that the yoke
shaft of the valve-diaphragm assembly is in front of rocker arm.
d. Maintenance of valve grip. No maintenance is required for the valve
grip other than replacement of worn or damaged parts, tightening of screws,
cleaning, and lubrication. (Par 49)
75. BARREL AND VALVE-BODY ASSEMBLY.
a. Description and functioning. (Fig 47) This assembly is part of the fuel
valve. It includes the barrel, valve body, and operating parts contained in
the barrel and valve body. The assembly consists of:
(1) Valve body, an aluminum housing, located at the rear of the gun
and mounted on the grip support by means of four screws and lock washers.
The valve body has four large threaded openings. The lower opening leads
into the valve grip. The side opening, which forms a Y with the main
portion of the body, is connected to the fuel-hose assembly. The front
opening is screwed on the barrel. The rear opening is closed by the spring
retainer and plug.
(2) Valve-diaphragm assembly, which transmits and reverses the
movement imparted to it by the rocker arm of the valve grip. (Par 74 a) It
also serves as a seal, keeping fuel from entering the valve grip. The valve-
diaphragm assembly includes:
(a) Yoke shaft, on which the rocker arm bears at the lower end of the
shaft.
(b) Yoke, a Y-shaped metal part which fits on the upper end of the
yoke shaft and is held to it by a steel pin. The yoke transmits motion from
the shaft to the yoke block, and is located within the valve body when the
valve is assembled.
(c) Diaphragm, a synthetic-rubber diaphragm held in a steel sleeve,
which fits snugly in the lower opening of the valve body. The yoke shaft
passes through the diaphragm.
washers and screws. Tighten screws, using screw driver.
(5) Attach valve grip to valve body, using the four lock washers and
inserting the four screws through the grip support. Make sure that the yoke
shaft of the valve-diaphragm assembly is in front of rocker arm.
d. Maintenance of valve grip. No maintenance is required for the valve
grip other than replacement of worn or damaged parts, tightening of screws,
cleaning, and lubrication. (Par 49)
75. BARREL AND VALVE-BODY ASSEMBLY.
a. Description and functioning. (Fig 47) This assembly is part of the fuel
valve. It includes the barrel, valve body, and operating parts contained in
the barrel and valve body. The assembly consists of:
(1) Valve body, an aluminum housing, located at the rear of the gun
and mounted on the grip support by means of four screws and lock washers.
The valve body has four large threaded openings. The lower opening leads
into the valve grip. The side opening, which forms a Y with the main
portion of the body, is connected to the fuel-hose assembly. The front
opening is screwed on the barrel. The rear opening is closed by the spring
retainer and plug.
(2) Valve-diaphragm assembly, which transmits and reverses the
movement imparted to it by the rocker arm of the valve grip. (Par 74 a) It
also serves as a seal, keeping fuel from entering the valve grip. The valve-
diaphragm assembly includes:
(a) Yoke shaft, on which the rocker arm bears at the lower end of the
shaft.
(b) Yoke, a Y-shaped metal part which fits on the upper end of the
yoke shaft and is held to it by a steel pin. The yoke transmits motion from
the shaft to the yoke block, and is located within the valve body when the
valve is assembled.
(c) Diaphragm, a synthetic-rubber diaphragm held in a steel sleeve,
which fits snugly in the lower opening of the valve body. The yoke shaft
passes through the diaphragm.
Page 138
(3) Diaphragm support, washer, and cap, which hold the valve-
diaphragm assembly in place in the valve body.
(4) Spring retainer, a brass, hollow bushing which screws into the rear
opening of the valve body, and which is threaded internally to receive the
plug. The retainer has a hexagonal head to take a 1-3/8-inch wrench. As its
name implies, the retainer holds the valve spring in position.
(5) Plug, a brass part, resembling a cap screw, which fits into the
spring retainer, closing off the rear end of the gun. It permits adjustment of
the needle (see d below) without removing the valve spring and spring
retainer.
(6) Valve spring, a coil spring located in the valve body between the
spring retainer and the yoke block. The spring keeps the needle seated in the
nozzle until compression of the grip safety and valve lever forces back the
yoke block, spring, and needle.
(7) Yoke block, a steel piece, 1 inch long, which fits into the arms of
the yoke Y. It is secured by an internal thread to the valve needle.
Movement of the yoke in turn moves the yoke block and the valve needle.
(8) Lock nut, on the valve-needle thread at the rear of the yoke block,
which locks the block on the needle.
(9) Valve-needle, a pointed rod, which extends through the inside of
the barrel from the yoke block to the nozzle. The valve needle is seated in
the nozzle except when firing. It controls the ejection of fuel from the
nozzle. Two sets of three fins each, known as needle guides, are mounted on
the front and rear of the needle, respectively. These guides keep the needle
centered in the barrel. The rear end of the valve needle is threaded to hold
the yoke block and permit adjustment of the needle by means of the lock
nut which screws on the threads. (See d below.)
(10) Barrel (Figs 47 and 54), which carries the fuel to the ignition
head. It also supports or contains other components of the gun. The barrel
assembly is replaced as a unit with the needle. It consists of a tube, made of
thin metal, with a threaded fitting at the back end, and a nozzle brazed into
the front end of the tube. The nozzle ejects the fuel from the barrel through
the ignition head. The fuel emerges from two holes in the nozzle:
diaphragm assembly in place in the valve body.
(4) Spring retainer, a brass, hollow bushing which screws into the rear
opening of the valve body, and which is threaded internally to receive the
plug. The retainer has a hexagonal head to take a 1-3/8-inch wrench. As its
name implies, the retainer holds the valve spring in position.
(5) Plug, a brass part, resembling a cap screw, which fits into the
spring retainer, closing off the rear end of the gun. It permits adjustment of
the needle (see d below) without removing the valve spring and spring
retainer.
(6) Valve spring, a coil spring located in the valve body between the
spring retainer and the yoke block. The spring keeps the needle seated in the
nozzle until compression of the grip safety and valve lever forces back the
yoke block, spring, and needle.
(7) Yoke block, a steel piece, 1 inch long, which fits into the arms of
the yoke Y. It is secured by an internal thread to the valve needle.
Movement of the yoke in turn moves the yoke block and the valve needle.
(8) Lock nut, on the valve-needle thread at the rear of the yoke block,
which locks the block on the needle.
(9) Valve-needle, a pointed rod, which extends through the inside of
the barrel from the yoke block to the nozzle. The valve needle is seated in
the nozzle except when firing. It controls the ejection of fuel from the
nozzle. Two sets of three fins each, known as needle guides, are mounted on
the front and rear of the needle, respectively. These guides keep the needle
centered in the barrel. The rear end of the valve needle is threaded to hold
the yoke block and permit adjustment of the needle by means of the lock
nut which screws on the threads. (See d below.)
(10) Barrel (Figs 47 and 54), which carries the fuel to the ignition
head. It also supports or contains other components of the gun. The barrel
assembly is replaced as a unit with the needle. It consists of a tube, made of
thin metal, with a threaded fitting at the back end, and a nozzle brazed into
the front end of the tube. The nozzle ejects the fuel from the barrel through
the ignition head. The fuel emerges from two holes in the nozzle:
Page 139
(a) Atomizer hole, a small opening which sprays a fine, readily
ignited mist of fuel. This helps ignite the main stream of fuel.
(b) Main hole, which is tapered inside, and which conveys the main
stream of fuel from the barrel. When the gun is not being fired, the valve
needle is seated in the main hole of the nozzle. When the gun is being fired,
the needle is withdrawn from the nozzle seat, permitting the fuel to be
forced from the gun.
b. Removal of barrel and valve-body assembly. If gun group and tank
group are connected, release any pressure in the fuel tanks by compressing
the valve lever and the grip safety. Then disassemble as follows:
(1) Unscrew the fuel-hose assembly from the fuel-valve body only if
this is necessary for maintenance.
(2) Remove spring retainer and plug from end of fuel-valve body and
remove valve spring.
Fig 50. Valve needle, yoke block, and lock nut ready for installation in
fuel-valve body.
(3) Unscrew diaphragm cap and pull out washer, support, and valve-
diaphragm assembly. To prevent loss of valve-needle adjustment (Fig 54),
do not disturb position of yoke block by turning the needle.
ignited mist of fuel. This helps ignite the main stream of fuel.
(b) Main hole, which is tapered inside, and which conveys the main
stream of fuel from the barrel. When the gun is not being fired, the valve
needle is seated in the main hole of the nozzle. When the gun is being fired,
the needle is withdrawn from the nozzle seat, permitting the fuel to be
forced from the gun.
b. Removal of barrel and valve-body assembly. If gun group and tank
group are connected, release any pressure in the fuel tanks by compressing
the valve lever and the grip safety. Then disassemble as follows:
(1) Unscrew the fuel-hose assembly from the fuel-valve body only if
this is necessary for maintenance.
(2) Remove spring retainer and plug from end of fuel-valve body and
remove valve spring.
Fig 50. Valve needle, yoke block, and lock nut ready for installation in
fuel-valve body.
(3) Unscrew diaphragm cap and pull out washer, support, and valve-
diaphragm assembly. To prevent loss of valve-needle adjustment (Fig 54),
do not disturb position of yoke block by turning the needle.
Page 140
Fig 51. Placing diaphragm assembly in position in fuel-valve body.
Fig 52. Installing parts in fuel-valve body.
Fig 52. Installing parts in fuel-valve body.
Page 141
(4) Slide the valve needle out of barrel; the yoke block and the lock nut
may then be unscrewed from the valve needle, but adjustment (see d below)
will be necessary when reinstalling.
c. Installation of barrel and valve-body assembly.
(1) To install valve needle, screw the yoke block and lock nut on the
needle (Fig 50). Insert needle in valve body and barrel.
(2) Insert valve-diaphragm assembly into valve body (Fig 51), making
sure that the yoke slips into the flat notches of yoke block.
Fig 53. Installing spring retainer in fuel-valve body.
(3) Slip the diaphragm support, washer, and cap over the yoke shaft.
(Fig 52) Screw on the diaphragm cap by hand. Do not use a wrench. Install
valve grip. (Par 74 c)
(4) Place valve spring over end of needle and install spring retainer.
(Fig 53) Apply wrench very lightly to tighten spring retainer.
(5) Adjust needle (see d below), and screw plug into the spring
retainer.
(6) If hose has been removed, apply anti-seize compound lightly to the
threads. Screw hose into fuel-valve body. Wrench should be applied very
lightly to tighten.
may then be unscrewed from the valve needle, but adjustment (see d below)
will be necessary when reinstalling.
c. Installation of barrel and valve-body assembly.
(1) To install valve needle, screw the yoke block and lock nut on the
needle (Fig 50). Insert needle in valve body and barrel.
(2) Insert valve-diaphragm assembly into valve body (Fig 51), making
sure that the yoke slips into the flat notches of yoke block.
Fig 53. Installing spring retainer in fuel-valve body.
(3) Slip the diaphragm support, washer, and cap over the yoke shaft.
(Fig 52) Screw on the diaphragm cap by hand. Do not use a wrench. Install
valve grip. (Par 74 c)
(4) Place valve spring over end of needle and install spring retainer.
(Fig 53) Apply wrench very lightly to tighten spring retainer.
(5) Adjust needle (see d below), and screw plug into the spring
retainer.
(6) If hose has been removed, apply anti-seize compound lightly to the
threads. Screw hose into fuel-valve body. Wrench should be applied very
lightly to tighten.
Page 142
d. Adjustment of valve needle. Needle is adjusted after installation of
parts in barrel and valve assembly. Use care when resetting needle, as
smooth operation of the weapon depends on accurate adjustment.
(1) Remove ignition shield (Par 18) and plug from gun.
(2) Use the valve-adjusting wrench (Fig 8) to hold the lock nut and
apply a cabinet (narrow-bladed) screw driver (Fig 8) in the end of the
needle. Turn needle until it makes a snug fit in the nozzle opening.
(3) Compress the valve lever and grip safety. The needle should draw
back into the nozzle with the tip of the needle at the smallest diameter
opening in the nozzle. (Fig 54)
(4) When the needle has been correctly adjusted, as in (3) above,
tighten the lock nut with the valve-adjusting wrench, keeping the needle
from turning with the screw driver. This will lock the adjustment. Screw
plug into the spring retainer.
(5) Replace ignition shield. (Par 18)
e. Maintenance of barrel and valve body.
Fig 54. Valve-needle adjustment. Solid lines show needle in correct open
position with point at smallest diameter of nozzle. Broken lines show
needle in closed position.
parts in barrel and valve assembly. Use care when resetting needle, as
smooth operation of the weapon depends on accurate adjustment.
(1) Remove ignition shield (Par 18) and plug from gun.
(2) Use the valve-adjusting wrench (Fig 8) to hold the lock nut and
apply a cabinet (narrow-bladed) screw driver (Fig 8) in the end of the
needle. Turn needle until it makes a snug fit in the nozzle opening.
(3) Compress the valve lever and grip safety. The needle should draw
back into the nozzle with the tip of the needle at the smallest diameter
opening in the nozzle. (Fig 54)
(4) When the needle has been correctly adjusted, as in (3) above,
tighten the lock nut with the valve-adjusting wrench, keeping the needle
from turning with the screw driver. This will lock the adjustment. Screw
plug into the spring retainer.
(5) Replace ignition shield. (Par 18)
e. Maintenance of barrel and valve body.
Fig 54. Valve-needle adjustment. Solid lines show needle in correct open
position with point at smallest diameter of nozzle. Broken lines show
needle in closed position.
Page 143
(1) Damaged parts. Replace worn or damaged parts. If the diaphragm
shows evidence of tears or separation, or if leaks occur at the diaphragm,
replace the valve-diaphragm assembly.
(2) Valve spring. If valve spring has lost resiliency, grasp it by the ends
and stretch slightly, or replace.
(3) Nozzle leaks. If valve leaks at nozzle, and cleaning (Par 55 d) does
not remedy the leak, adjust needle (see d above). If leak persists, either
replace barrel and needle, or lap seat. To lap, place lapping compound on
seat (in nozzle) and on needle point. Turn needle in seat until parts make a
tight connection when seated. Remove lapping compound, reassemble,
adjust needle, and test fire.
(4) Atomizer hole. If atomizer hole is clogged, clean with fine wire.
(Par 52 i)
76. IGNITION HEAD.
a. Description and functioning. (Fig 55) The ignition head ignites the fuel
when the flame thrower is fired. It is mounted on the fore part of the barrel.
It consists of:
(1) Ignition-head body, which includes half of the front grip. Three set
screws serve to tighten the ignition-head body to the barrel. The ignition-
head body is made of aluminum.
(2) Trigger and trigger bearing, held between the ignition-head body
and the coverplate by the trigger screw.
(3) Trigger rod, one end of which is held in the trigger bearing, the
other extending through the ignition-head body. Pulling the trigger shoves
the trigger rod forward, causing it to push a match in the ignition cylinder.
The match ignites an incendiary charge in the ignition cylinder.
(4) Trigger spring, which hooks over a projection of the trigger and is
held at its lower end by a screw, which is held in the ignition-head body.
This spring pulls the trigger rod back from the firing position after the firer
releases the trigger.
(5) Latch, located in the ignition-head body, in front of and above the
trigger guard. The latch, set on a pin, engages the notch of the ignition
shows evidence of tears or separation, or if leaks occur at the diaphragm,
replace the valve-diaphragm assembly.
(2) Valve spring. If valve spring has lost resiliency, grasp it by the ends
and stretch slightly, or replace.
(3) Nozzle leaks. If valve leaks at nozzle, and cleaning (Par 55 d) does
not remedy the leak, adjust needle (see d above). If leak persists, either
replace barrel and needle, or lap seat. To lap, place lapping compound on
seat (in nozzle) and on needle point. Turn needle in seat until parts make a
tight connection when seated. Remove lapping compound, reassemble,
adjust needle, and test fire.
(4) Atomizer hole. If atomizer hole is clogged, clean with fine wire.
(Par 52 i)
76. IGNITION HEAD.
a. Description and functioning. (Fig 55) The ignition head ignites the fuel
when the flame thrower is fired. It is mounted on the fore part of the barrel.
It consists of:
(1) Ignition-head body, which includes half of the front grip. Three set
screws serve to tighten the ignition-head body to the barrel. The ignition-
head body is made of aluminum.
(2) Trigger and trigger bearing, held between the ignition-head body
and the coverplate by the trigger screw.
(3) Trigger rod, one end of which is held in the trigger bearing, the
other extending through the ignition-head body. Pulling the trigger shoves
the trigger rod forward, causing it to push a match in the ignition cylinder.
The match ignites an incendiary charge in the ignition cylinder.
(4) Trigger spring, which hooks over a projection of the trigger and is
held at its lower end by a screw, which is held in the ignition-head body.
This spring pulls the trigger rod back from the firing position after the firer
releases the trigger.
(5) Latch, located in the ignition-head body, in front of and above the
trigger guard. The latch, set on a pin, engages the notch of the ignition
Page 144
shield, locking it in place. A latch spring holds latch in position.
(6) Coverplate, an aluminum casting which constitutes the left section
of the front grip and covers the working parts seated in the ignition head
body. The coverplate and body are held together by four screws and four
lock washers.
(7) Spring case, which turns the ignition cylinder when the trigger is
pulled.
(a) Four projections on the inner spring case are bent over the outer
spring case to hold the two parts together.
(b) The inner-case pin (Fig 56) engages a stop on the inside of the
ignition cylinder. The five projecting metal matches on the inside of the
ignition cylinder are each in turn stopped by the lug on the forward-facing
surface of the ignition-head body.
Fig 55. Ignition head disassembled, showing nomenclature and Chemical
Warfare Service stock numbers for requisitioning spare parts.
(6) Coverplate, an aluminum casting which constitutes the left section
of the front grip and covers the working parts seated in the ignition head
body. The coverplate and body are held together by four screws and four
lock washers.
(7) Spring case, which turns the ignition cylinder when the trigger is
pulled.
(a) Four projections on the inner spring case are bent over the outer
spring case to hold the two parts together.
(b) The inner-case pin (Fig 56) engages a stop on the inside of the
ignition cylinder. The five projecting metal matches on the inside of the
ignition cylinder are each in turn stopped by the lug on the forward-facing
surface of the ignition-head body.
Fig 55. Ignition head disassembled, showing nomenclature and Chemical
Warfare Service stock numbers for requisitioning spare parts.
Page 145
When the trigger is pulled, the trigger rod pushes a match forward, causing
an incendiary charge in the ignition cylinder to ignite. The spring in the case
rotates the ignition cylinder until another match is stopped by the lug.
Fig 56. Parts of ignition head and ignition cylinder.
(c) The outer-case pin (on the outside surface of the outer spring
case) fits into the notch in the ignition shield and holds the spring case as
the shield is screwed into position. This action winds the spring in the case.
(d) A snap ring holds the spring case on the ignition-head body.
(8) Ignition shield, a cylindrical, thin-metal tube with a conical front
end. The shield guides the flame and protects the firer. Eight holes around
the base of the cone provide an air intake for burning the fuel. The base of
the shield is threaded, and it screws onto the ignition-head body. A notch
(Fig 56) in the base of the shield receives the latch and the outer-case pin of
the spring case.
b. Removal of ignition head. To remove the ignition head, proceed as
follows:
(1) Remove shield by lifting latch and unscrewing shield
counterclockwise. (Fig 14) Keep hands and face away from front of barrel.
an incendiary charge in the ignition cylinder to ignite. The spring in the case
rotates the ignition cylinder until another match is stopped by the lug.
Fig 56. Parts of ignition head and ignition cylinder.
(c) The outer-case pin (on the outside surface of the outer spring
case) fits into the notch in the ignition shield and holds the spring case as
the shield is screwed into position. This action winds the spring in the case.
(d) A snap ring holds the spring case on the ignition-head body.
(8) Ignition shield, a cylindrical, thin-metal tube with a conical front
end. The shield guides the flame and protects the firer. Eight holes around
the base of the cone provide an air intake for burning the fuel. The base of
the shield is threaded, and it screws onto the ignition-head body. A notch
(Fig 56) in the base of the shield receives the latch and the outer-case pin of
the spring case.
b. Removal of ignition head. To remove the ignition head, proceed as
follows:
(1) Remove shield by lifting latch and unscrewing shield
counterclockwise. (Fig 14) Keep hands and face away from front of barrel.
Page 146
(2) If ignition cylinder has not been removed, remove it or allow it to
fall off barrel.
(3) Pry off snap ring which holds spring case in position, using screw
driver. (Fig 57) Be careful not to damage or break the ignition-head body by
applying too much leverage.
(4) Remove the four screws and lock washers which hold ignition-
head body and coverplate together. Lift off coverplate.
(5) Trigger, trigger spring, trigger rod, latch, and latch spring may be
removed.
(6) Using a hex wrench, loosen set screws (Fig 58) and withdraw
barrel from ignition head.
c. Installation of ignition head. To install ignition head, proceed as
follows:
(1) Insert barrel in ignition-head body, pushing it as far forward as the
shoulder on the barrel permits.
(2) Aline front grip and valve grip.
(3) Using hex wrench, tighten set screws on barrel enough to hold but
not so tight that barrel is dented.
(4) Place latch, latch spring, trigger and bearing, trigger rod, and
trigger spring in position.
(5) Put coverplate on ignition-head body and replace the four lock
washers and screws.
(6) Slip spring case over barrel, and lock by forcing snap ring into the
groove.
(7) When weapon is to be used on a mission, fit ignition cylinder and
ignition shield in place on nozzle end of barrel as described in Paragraph
18.
d. Maintenance of ignition head.
(1) Servicing. The ignition head should be cleaned and lubricated each
time it is disassembled. (Par 49)
fall off barrel.
(3) Pry off snap ring which holds spring case in position, using screw
driver. (Fig 57) Be careful not to damage or break the ignition-head body by
applying too much leverage.
(4) Remove the four screws and lock washers which hold ignition-
head body and coverplate together. Lift off coverplate.
(5) Trigger, trigger spring, trigger rod, latch, and latch spring may be
removed.
(6) Using a hex wrench, loosen set screws (Fig 58) and withdraw
barrel from ignition head.
c. Installation of ignition head. To install ignition head, proceed as
follows:
(1) Insert barrel in ignition-head body, pushing it as far forward as the
shoulder on the barrel permits.
(2) Aline front grip and valve grip.
(3) Using hex wrench, tighten set screws on barrel enough to hold but
not so tight that barrel is dented.
(4) Place latch, latch spring, trigger and bearing, trigger rod, and
trigger spring in position.
(5) Put coverplate on ignition-head body and replace the four lock
washers and screws.
(6) Slip spring case over barrel, and lock by forcing snap ring into the
groove.
(7) When weapon is to be used on a mission, fit ignition cylinder and
ignition shield in place on nozzle end of barrel as described in Paragraph
18.
d. Maintenance of ignition head.
(1) Servicing. The ignition head should be cleaned and lubricated each
time it is disassembled. (Par 49)
Page 147
(2) Spring-case assembly. If outer case rotates and inner case does not,
and no spring action occurs, spring is broken and spring case should be
replaced as a unit. Do not disassemble or repair this part.
(3) Trigger rod and lug. When trigger is pulled all the way, end of
trigger rod should extend 1/16 inch beyond lug on forward-facing surface of
ignition-head body. If end of trigger rod is worn, replace rod. Lug on the
ignition-head body should be approximately 7/32 inch high. If lug is worn
or broken, replace ignition head body.
Fig 57. Prying snap ring from ignition head to remove spring case.
and no spring action occurs, spring is broken and spring case should be
replaced as a unit. Do not disassemble or repair this part.
(3) Trigger rod and lug. When trigger is pulled all the way, end of
trigger rod should extend 1/16 inch beyond lug on forward-facing surface of
ignition-head body. If end of trigger rod is worn, replace rod. Lug on the
ignition-head body should be approximately 7/32 inch high. If lug is worn
or broken, replace ignition head body.
Fig 57. Prying snap ring from ignition head to remove spring case.
Page 148
Fig 58. Loosening set screws with wrench so ignition head may be lifted
off barrel.
off barrel.
Page 149
APPENDIX
Section XVIII SHIPMENT AND STORAGE
77. SHIPMENT AND STORAGE.
The flame thrower is shipped and stored in a wooden packing case (Fig 59),
which measures approximately 34 inches by 23 inches by 19 inches.
Cubage of the case is approximately 8-1/2 cubic feet.
Fig 59. Opened packing chest showing flame thrower and other contents
as received.
Section XVIII SHIPMENT AND STORAGE
77. SHIPMENT AND STORAGE.
The flame thrower is shipped and stored in a wooden packing case (Fig 59),
which measures approximately 34 inches by 23 inches by 19 inches.
Cubage of the case is approximately 8-1/2 cubic feet.
Fig 59. Opened packing chest showing flame thrower and other contents
as received.
Page 150
a. Storage procedure. After use and servicing (Pars 55 and 56), if the
weapon is not to be promptly reused on another mission, it should be
returned to the packing case. Before disconnecting the gun group from the
tank group and storing the weapon, the ignition cylinder should be
removed, the fuel discharged, and the pressure released. Operate fuel valve
to release any residual pressure in the fuel tanks. The deflector tube must be
removed from the safety head (Fig 11) to permit the tank group to fit into
the chest. The deflector tube should be kept in the spare parts kit or tool kit
until the next use of the weapon. The spare parts kit, the tool kit, the extra
cans of cylinders, TM 3-376A, and the coupling plug (Fig 7) should remain
in the chest except when they are being used. Wooden fittings hold the tank
group in place, with the pressure tank up. The gun group is disconnected
from the tank group and is kept with fuel hose connected to the gun on the
gun mounting board in the chest. (Fig 10)
b. Rust prevention. If the flame thrower, parts, and tools are to be stored
for a considerable length of time, especially in a damp climate, all exposed
metal surfaces should be covered with a rust-preventive compound. Store in
a dry place.
weapon is not to be promptly reused on another mission, it should be
returned to the packing case. Before disconnecting the gun group from the
tank group and storing the weapon, the ignition cylinder should be
removed, the fuel discharged, and the pressure released. Operate fuel valve
to release any residual pressure in the fuel tanks. The deflector tube must be
removed from the safety head (Fig 11) to permit the tank group to fit into
the chest. The deflector tube should be kept in the spare parts kit or tool kit
until the next use of the weapon. The spare parts kit, the tool kit, the extra
cans of cylinders, TM 3-376A, and the coupling plug (Fig 7) should remain
in the chest except when they are being used. Wooden fittings hold the tank
group in place, with the pressure tank up. The gun group is disconnected
from the tank group and is kept with fuel hose connected to the gun on the
gun mounting board in the chest. (Fig 10)
b. Rust prevention. If the flame thrower, parts, and tools are to be stored
for a considerable length of time, especially in a damp climate, all exposed
metal surfaces should be covered with a rust-preventive compound. Store in
a dry place.
Page 151
Section XIX LIST OF REFERENCES
78. REFERENCES.
References pertaining to the care and use of flame throwers include:
AR 850-20 Precautions in Handling Gasoline
AR 850-60 Compressed Gas Cylinders; Safe Handling, Storing,
Shipping, Using
FM 31-50 Attack on a Fortified Position and Combat in Towns
FM 100-5 Operations
TM 3-220 Decontamination
TM 9-850 Cleaning, Preserving, Lubricating, and Welding Materials
and Similar Items Issued by the Ordnance Department
78. REFERENCES.
References pertaining to the care and use of flame throwers include:
AR 850-20 Precautions in Handling Gasoline
AR 850-60 Compressed Gas Cylinders; Safe Handling, Storing,
Shipping, Using
FM 31-50 Attack on a Fortified Position and Combat in Towns
FM 100-5 Operations
TM 3-220 Decontamination
TM 9-850 Cleaning, Preserving, Lubricating, and Welding Materials
and Similar Items Issued by the Ordnance Department
Page 152
INDEX
Paragraphs
-A-
Adjustable-end wrench, 10a, 48a
Adjustment of fire, 25, 26c
After firing, 30, 55, 56
After six missions, 56
Aging of fuel, 35j
Aiming, 25, 26c, 34
Air compressor, 32a, 32b, 39a
Alcohol, 35a
Angles of tanks when firing, 24b
Anti-seize compound
source of, 48b
use of, 58b, 70c, 73c
Assistants, 4f, 15
Atomizer hole
cleaning, 52i
description, 75a
-B-
Barrel
adjustment, 52e, 75d
cleaning, 55d, 55i
damage to, 62, 75e
description, 75a
maintenance, 62, 75e
Barrel and valve-body assembly, 75
Bleeders, 32c
Burning time of fuels, 34
Bursts, 4b, 9b, 25c, 28, 29
Bushing, pipe, 3/4 inch by 1/2 inch, 8, 10b, 48b
Paragraphs
-A-
Adjustable-end wrench, 10a, 48a
Adjustment of fire, 25, 26c
After firing, 30, 55, 56
After six missions, 56
Aging of fuel, 35j
Aiming, 25, 26c, 34
Air compressor, 32a, 32b, 39a
Alcohol, 35a
Angles of tanks when firing, 24b
Anti-seize compound
source of, 48b
use of, 58b, 70c, 73c
Assistants, 4f, 15
Atomizer hole
cleaning, 52i
description, 75a
-B-
Barrel
adjustment, 52e, 75d
cleaning, 55d, 55i
damage to, 62, 75e
description, 75a
maintenance, 62, 75e
Barrel and valve-body assembly, 75
Bleeders, 32c
Burning time of fuels, 34
Bursts, 4b, 9b, 25c, 28, 29
Bushing, pipe, 3/4 inch by 1/2 inch, 8, 10b, 48b
Page 153
-C-
Cap, diaphragm, 75
Capacity, fuel, 9e, 68a
Carrier
adjustment, 19, 56e, 60, 71
description, 5a, 71a
installation, 71c
maintenance, 71e
preventive maintenance, 51, 55h
removal, 71b
Carrier frame, 71
Carrier pack, 71
Carrying the flame thrower, 19, 20, 55b, 56e, 60, 71
Catalog, 48b
Charging of pressure tank, 4g, 32, 33, 61c, 66a
Check valve
description, 66a
installation, 66b
operation, 31, 32, 53d
removal, 66b
replacement, 66e
Cleaning
gun, 49a, 55, 56f, 58c, 74d, 75e, 76d
tank group, 55, 58c, 68c, 71e
Cold weather, 34-36, 44, 49, 64
Compound, anti-seize
source of, 48b
use of, 58b, 70c, 73c
Compound, pipe thread (anti-seize), 48b, 58b, 70c, 73c
Compressed air
charging apparatus, 32, 33, 46, 48b
leaks, 56b, 61c
release of, 66b
volume required, 9g, 32c
Cap, diaphragm, 75
Capacity, fuel, 9e, 68a
Carrier
adjustment, 19, 56e, 60, 71
description, 5a, 71a
installation, 71c
maintenance, 71e
preventive maintenance, 51, 55h
removal, 71b
Carrier frame, 71
Carrier pack, 71
Carrying the flame thrower, 19, 20, 55b, 56e, 60, 71
Catalog, 48b
Charging of pressure tank, 4g, 32, 33, 61c, 66a
Check valve
description, 66a
installation, 66b
operation, 31, 32, 53d
removal, 66b
replacement, 66e
Cleaning
gun, 49a, 55, 56f, 58c, 74d, 75e, 76d
tank group, 55, 58c, 68c, 71e
Cold weather, 34-36, 44, 49, 64
Compound, anti-seize
source of, 48b
use of, 58b, 70c, 73c
Compound, pipe thread (anti-seize), 48b, 58b, 70c, 73c
Compressed air
charging apparatus, 32, 33, 46, 48b
leaks, 56b, 61c
release of, 66b
volume required, 9g, 32c
Page 154
Compressor, air, 32a, 32b
Controls, 14, 21, 26, 61, 74, 76
Cord
description, 71a
installation, 71c
replacement, 48b, 60, 71e
tightening, 51h, 60, 71d
Cotter pins, 71
Coupling plug, 10f, 17, 39c, 48b, 70
Coupling washer, 10b, 48b, 58f, 70, 73d
Coverplate, 76
Cubage, 9d
Crankcase drainings, 36
Cylinders
destruction, 46
number required, 9g, 32b
use of, in charging, 32, 33
use of, in filling, 39
-D-
Dampness
effect on fuel, 35e
effect on ignition cylinder, 31, 41
effect on thickener, 35e
effect on weapon, 41, 51g, 71e, 77b
Deflector tube, 12j, 69, 77a
Description of flame thrower, 5, 65-76
Destruction
accessories, 46b, d
flame thrower, 46a
fuel, 46c
ignition cylinders, 30a, 46f
thickener, 46e
Diaphragm, 75
Diaphragm cap, 75
Controls, 14, 21, 26, 61, 74, 76
Cord
description, 71a
installation, 71c
replacement, 48b, 60, 71e
tightening, 51h, 60, 71d
Cotter pins, 71
Coupling plug, 10f, 17, 39c, 48b, 70
Coupling washer, 10b, 48b, 58f, 70, 73d
Coverplate, 76
Cubage, 9d
Crankcase drainings, 36
Cylinders
destruction, 46
number required, 9g, 32b
use of, in charging, 32, 33
use of, in filling, 39
-D-
Dampness
effect on fuel, 35e
effect on ignition cylinder, 31, 41
effect on thickener, 35e
effect on weapon, 41, 51g, 71e, 77b
Deflector tube, 12j, 69, 77a
Description of flame thrower, 5, 65-76
Destruction
accessories, 46b, d
flame thrower, 46a
fuel, 46c
ignition cylinders, 30a, 46f
thickener, 46e
Diaphragm, 75
Diaphragm cap, 75
Page 155
Diaphragm support, 75
Diaphragm, valve, assembly, 10b, 48b, 56e, 58a, 74, 75
Diaphragm washer, 75
Diesel oil, 35, 36, 40
Differences in models, 7
Diffusion-pipe assembly, 67, 68
Dimensions, 9d
Discharge time, 9b
Dome-type regulator, 67d
Drums, 35-40
Duration of fire, 9b, 34
Dust
blowing out, 33j
effect on operation, 42
-E-
E1 ignition cylinders, 18a, 31
E3 portable flame thrower, 7a
Engineers’ wrenches, 10a, 48a
-F-
Filling fuel tanks
by blowing, 39
by force pump, 38
by pouring, 37
service when filling, 53
Filling plug, 37, 39, 49, 51d, 56b, 69
Filling with fuel, 4g, 34-40
Fire precautions, 15c, 40, 55
Firers, 4f, 15
Firing technique, 26-30, 54, 56b
Flexible shaft, valve
adjustment, 66d
description, 66a
installation, 66c
lubrication, 49
Diaphragm, valve, assembly, 10b, 48b, 56e, 58a, 74, 75
Diaphragm washer, 75
Diesel oil, 35, 36, 40
Differences in models, 7
Diffusion-pipe assembly, 67, 68
Dimensions, 9d
Discharge time, 9b
Dome-type regulator, 67d
Drums, 35-40
Duration of fire, 9b, 34
Dust
blowing out, 33j
effect on operation, 42
-E-
E1 ignition cylinders, 18a, 31
E3 portable flame thrower, 7a
Engineers’ wrenches, 10a, 48a
-F-
Filling fuel tanks
by blowing, 39
by force pump, 38
by pouring, 37
service when filling, 53
Filling plug, 37, 39, 49, 51d, 56b, 69
Filling with fuel, 4g, 34-40
Fire precautions, 15c, 40, 55
Firers, 4f, 15
Firing technique, 26-30, 54, 56b
Flexible shaft, valve
adjustment, 66d
description, 66a
installation, 66c
lubrication, 49
Page 156
removal, 66b
Frame clamp, 68a, 71
Fuel
capacity, 9e, 68a
characteristics, 34
destruction, 46c
left in tanks, 24b
per 100 fillings, 9g
precautions, 35-40, 41
preparation, 35, 40
ranges, 22
weight, 9c
Fuel-filling hose, 39
Fuel-filling line, 39, 46b
Fuel hose
description, 70a
installation, 70c, 73c, 75
length, 9d
maintenance, 40j, 52, 73d
removal, 40j, 70b, 73b, 75
replacement, 5b, 48b, 58, 70, 73
stiffening of, 21
Fuel oils, 35, 36, 40
Fuel tanks
angle when firing, 24b
cleaning, 53a, 53b
description, 5a, 68a
fuel level, 53b, 68a
inspection, 53a
installation, 68b
maintenance, 68c
removal, 68b
Fuel valve
adjustment, 61a
Frame clamp, 68a, 71
Fuel
capacity, 9e, 68a
characteristics, 34
destruction, 46c
left in tanks, 24b
per 100 fillings, 9g
precautions, 35-40, 41
preparation, 35, 40
ranges, 22
weight, 9c
Fuel-filling hose, 39
Fuel-filling line, 39, 46b
Fuel hose
description, 70a
installation, 70c, 73c, 75
length, 9d
maintenance, 40j, 52, 73d
removal, 40j, 70b, 73b, 75
replacement, 5b, 48b, 58, 70, 73
stiffening of, 21
Fuel oils, 35, 36, 40
Fuel tanks
angle when firing, 24b
cleaning, 53a, 53b
description, 5a, 68a
fuel level, 53b, 68a
inspection, 53a
installation, 68b
maintenance, 68c
removal, 68b
Fuel valve
adjustment, 61a
Page 157
cleaning, 56f, 61d
description, 5b, 74a, 75a
effects of dirt, 42
failure to close, 62
installation, 61a, 74c, 75c
leaks, 56, 58
lubrication, 49
operation, 14c, 26b, 61a, 74a, 75a
removal, 74b, 75b
testing, 56c
Funnel, 35-37
-G-
Gage, fuel-tank testing, 48b, 56b, 67d
Gage, pressure testing, 48b, 53d, 56b, 67d
Gasoline, in fuels, 34-40, 43, 44
Gloves, 21g
Grease, 49
Grip safety, 14c, 49, 56d, 62, 74
Grip support, 74
Gun
assembling, 74-76
carrying, 25
cleaning, 55d, 55i, 56f, 74d, 75e, 76d
description, 5b, 14, 72, 74-76
disassembling, 74-76
length, 9d
lubrication, 49
mounting board, 10e
preventive maintenance, 50, 52, 54-56
requisitioning, 5b
storage, 12g
Gun group
assembling, 72-76
connecting to tank group, 17, 70, 73
description, 5b, 74a, 75a
effects of dirt, 42
failure to close, 62
installation, 61a, 74c, 75c
leaks, 56, 58
lubrication, 49
operation, 14c, 26b, 61a, 74a, 75a
removal, 74b, 75b
testing, 56c
Funnel, 35-37
-G-
Gage, fuel-tank testing, 48b, 56b, 67d
Gage, pressure testing, 48b, 53d, 56b, 67d
Gasoline, in fuels, 34-40, 43, 44
Gloves, 21g
Grease, 49
Grip safety, 14c, 49, 56d, 62, 74
Grip support, 74
Gun
assembling, 74-76
carrying, 25
cleaning, 55d, 55i, 56f, 74d, 75e, 76d
description, 5b, 14, 72, 74-76
disassembling, 74-76
length, 9d
lubrication, 49
mounting board, 10e
preventive maintenance, 50, 52, 54-56
requisitioning, 5b
storage, 12g
Gun group
assembling, 72-76
connecting to tank group, 17, 70, 73
Page 158
description, 5b, 14, 72-76
disassembly, 72-76
lubrication, 49
maintenance, 72-76
preventive maintenance, 50, 52, 54-56
storage, 12g
weight, 9c
-H-
Heat, effect on fuel, 34-36, 40, 43
Hex wrenches, 10a, 48a, 67d, 76b, 76c
Hose connector, 68a
Hose, fuel
description, 73a
installation, 70c, 73c, 75
length, 9d
maintenance, 40j, 73d
removal, 40j, 70c, 73b, 75
replacement, 5b, 48b, 58, 70, 73
stiffening of, 21
-I-
Identification, 6
Ignition action, 14b, 44, 76a
Ignition cylinders
action, 14b, 31, 76a
description, 31, 76a
destruction, 30a, 46f
discarding, 30a
duration of fire, 9b
failure, 54a, 63, 64
loading of gun, 18, 76a
packing, 10c, 31
precautions, 18, 20, 31
storing, 31, 41
use in training, 15b, 18a, 30a
disassembly, 72-76
lubrication, 49
maintenance, 72-76
preventive maintenance, 50, 52, 54-56
storage, 12g
weight, 9c
-H-
Heat, effect on fuel, 34-36, 40, 43
Hex wrenches, 10a, 48a, 67d, 76b, 76c
Hose connector, 68a
Hose, fuel
description, 73a
installation, 70c, 73c, 75
length, 9d
maintenance, 40j, 73d
removal, 40j, 70c, 73b, 75
replacement, 5b, 48b, 58, 70, 73
stiffening of, 21
-I-
Identification, 6
Ignition action, 14b, 44, 76a
Ignition cylinders
action, 14b, 31, 76a
description, 31, 76a
destruction, 30a, 46f
discarding, 30a
duration of fire, 9b
failure, 54a, 63, 64
loading of gun, 18, 76a
packing, 10c, 31
precautions, 18, 20, 31
storing, 31, 41
use in training, 15b, 18a, 30a
Page 159
Ignition failure, 18, 26, 31, 44, 54a, 63, 64, 76d
Ignition head
assembling, 76c
cleaning, 49, 52, 54a, 76d
description, 5b, 76a
disassembling, 18, 76b
effects of dirt, 42, 52
failure, 54a, 63, 64, 76d
installation, 76c
loading, 18, 76a
lubrication, 49, 76d
maintenance, 76d
removal, 76b
Ignition-head body, 76
Ignition shield, 18, 52d, 54a, 55d, 76
Immersion, effects of, 41
Incendiary effects, 3, 34, 44
Interchanging with E3, 7a
Interchanging with M1 or M1A1, 7b, 8
-J-
Jungle ranges, 22
-K-
Kerosene, 35a, 36a, 40
Kit
tool, 10, 77a
spare parts, 10, 77a
service, 48
-L-
Lapping needle and nozzle, 75e
Latch, 76
Leaded gasoline, 40n
Leaks
fuel, 56, 58, 66b, 68-70, 73-75
pressure, 21, 51b, 53d, 56b, 61c, 66b
Ignition head
assembling, 76c
cleaning, 49, 52, 54a, 76d
description, 5b, 76a
disassembling, 18, 76b
effects of dirt, 42, 52
failure, 54a, 63, 64, 76d
installation, 76c
loading, 18, 76a
lubrication, 49, 76d
maintenance, 76d
removal, 76b
Ignition-head body, 76
Ignition shield, 18, 52d, 54a, 55d, 76
Immersion, effects of, 41
Incendiary effects, 3, 34, 44
Interchanging with E3, 7a
Interchanging with M1 or M1A1, 7b, 8
-J-
Jungle ranges, 22
-K-
Kerosene, 35a, 36a, 40
Kit
tool, 10, 77a
spare parts, 10, 77a
service, 48
-L-
Lapping needle and nozzle, 75e
Latch, 76
Leaded gasoline, 40n
Leaks
fuel, 56, 58, 66b, 68-70, 73-75
pressure, 21, 51b, 53d, 56b, 61c, 66b
Page 160
Left valve grip, 74
Line, fuel-filling, 39
Lines, charging and filling
destruction, 46
source, 48b
use, 32, 33
Liquid fuels
aiming, 25
characteristics, 34
filling, 37, 38
precautions, 36-40
preparation, 35, 40
ranges, 22, 34
Loading ignition cylinder, 18, 76a
Lubrication, 49
-M-
Marking, 6, 18a
M1 and M1A1 portable flame throwers, 7b, 8
Moisture
effect on fuel, 35e
effect on ignition cylinder, 31, 41
effect on thickener, 35e
effect on weapon, 41, 51g, 71e, 77b
Mounting board, 12g
-N-
Needle
adjustment, 52e, 75d
cleaning, 52, 55d
description, 75a
installation, 75c
leaks, 58
removal, 75b
Nitrogen
charging apparatus, 32, 33, 46, 48b
Line, fuel-filling, 39
Lines, charging and filling
destruction, 46
source, 48b
use, 32, 33
Liquid fuels
aiming, 25
characteristics, 34
filling, 37, 38
precautions, 36-40
preparation, 35, 40
ranges, 22, 34
Loading ignition cylinder, 18, 76a
Lubrication, 49
-M-
Marking, 6, 18a
M1 and M1A1 portable flame throwers, 7b, 8
Moisture
effect on fuel, 35e
effect on ignition cylinder, 31, 41
effect on thickener, 35e
effect on weapon, 41, 51g, 71e, 77b
Mounting board, 12g
-N-
Needle
adjustment, 52e, 75d
cleaning, 52, 55d
description, 75a
installation, 75c
leaks, 58
removal, 75b
Nitrogen
charging apparatus, 32, 33, 46, 48b
Page 161
leaks, 56b, 61c
release of, 66b
volume required, 9g, 32c
Nozzle
adjustment, 52e, 56b, 75d
cleaning, 52, 55d
description, 75a
leaks, 56b, 58, 75e
-O-
Oxygen, hazard from use, 32c
-P-
Packing chest
cubage, 9d
dimensions, 9d
opening, 12
use of, 12, 30
weight, 9c
Paddle, 35, 36
Painting, 13, 41, 68c
Pins, (carrier) 71
Plug, coupling, 10f, 17, 39c, 48b, 70
Plug, filling, 37, 39, 49, 51d, 56b, 69
Plug-retainer assembly, 69
Plug, safety-head, 37, 39, 49, 51d, 69
Plug, testing, 56b, 67d
Point-blank range, 22
Positions, firing, 24
Precautions
in training, 15
when charging, 33
when filling with fuel, 37-40
when firing, 22a, 24d
when preparing fuel, 35, 36, 40
when servicing, 57
release of, 66b
volume required, 9g, 32c
Nozzle
adjustment, 52e, 56b, 75d
cleaning, 52, 55d
description, 75a
leaks, 56b, 58, 75e
-O-
Oxygen, hazard from use, 32c
-P-
Packing chest
cubage, 9d
dimensions, 9d
opening, 12
use of, 12, 30
weight, 9c
Paddle, 35, 36
Painting, 13, 41, 68c
Pins, (carrier) 71
Plug, coupling, 10f, 17, 39c, 48b, 70
Plug, filling, 37, 39, 49, 51d, 56b, 69
Plug-retainer assembly, 69
Plug, safety-head, 37, 39, 49, 51d, 69
Plug, testing, 56b, 67d
Point-blank range, 22
Positions, firing, 24
Precautions
in training, 15
when charging, 33
when filling with fuel, 37-40
when firing, 22a, 24d
when preparing fuel, 35, 36, 40
when servicing, 57
Page 162
with cylinder, 18, 31, 57
with gun, 20
Pressure
charging, 32, 33
charging apparatus, 32, 33, 46, 48b
lack of, 56b, 61
leaks, 56b, 61c
pounds of, 9f, 32, 56b
release of, 66b
testing for, 53d, 56b
Pressure regulator
adjustment, 56b, 59, 67d
description, 5a, 67a
effects of dirt, 42
installation, 66c, 67c
removal, 67b
replacement, 48b, 56b, 59, 67
testing, 56b, 61b, 67d
Pressure tank
charging, 32, 33
description, 5a, 66a
installation, 66c
removal, 66b
replacement, 4g, 48b
Pressure tank and valve assembly
adjustment, 66d
description, 5a, 66a
installation, 66c
maintenance, 66e
removal, 66b
testing for leaks, 53d
Pressure-tank clamp
description, 66a
installation, 66c
with gun, 20
Pressure
charging, 32, 33
charging apparatus, 32, 33, 46, 48b
lack of, 56b, 61
leaks, 56b, 61c
pounds of, 9f, 32, 56b
release of, 66b
testing for, 53d, 56b
Pressure regulator
adjustment, 56b, 59, 67d
description, 5a, 67a
effects of dirt, 42
installation, 66c, 67c
removal, 67b
replacement, 48b, 56b, 59, 67
testing, 56b, 61b, 67d
Pressure tank
charging, 32, 33
description, 5a, 66a
installation, 66c
removal, 66b
replacement, 4g, 48b
Pressure tank and valve assembly
adjustment, 66d
description, 5a, 66a
installation, 66c
maintenance, 66e
removal, 66b
testing for leaks, 53d
Pressure-tank clamp
description, 66a
installation, 66c
Page 163
removal, 66b
repair, 51e
Pressure-tank valve
description, 5a, 66a
effects of dirt, 42
installation, 66c
operation, 14a, 21, 55g, 61b
removal, 66b
replacement, 48b, 66e
testing, 51a, 53c
Pressure-tank valve handle, 14a, 21, 48b, 66
Preventive maintenance services, 50-56
Pump
force, 38
air, 39a
-R-
Rain, effect on firing, 41, 77b
Ranges, 4c, 15b, 15c, 22, 61, 67d
Recoil, 24c
Records, 2, 49a
References, 1b, 78
Regulator tube, 66, 67
Removal of tank group, 55b, 66-71
Right valve grip, 74
Rocker arm, 49, 74, 75a
-S-
Safety, grip, 14c, 62, 74
Safety-head plug, 37, 39, 51d, 69
Safety head, replacement, 51d, 54b, 55f, 56b, 59, 69
Screening effect, 3, 34
Screw drivers, 10a, 48a, 52f, 74c, 75d, 76b
Seine cord
description, 71a
installation, 71c
repair, 51e
Pressure-tank valve
description, 5a, 66a
effects of dirt, 42
installation, 66c
operation, 14a, 21, 55g, 61b
removal, 66b
replacement, 48b, 66e
testing, 51a, 53c
Pressure-tank valve handle, 14a, 21, 48b, 66
Preventive maintenance services, 50-56
Pump
force, 38
air, 39a
-R-
Rain, effect on firing, 41, 77b
Ranges, 4c, 15b, 15c, 22, 61, 67d
Recoil, 24c
Records, 2, 49a
References, 1b, 78
Regulator tube, 66, 67
Removal of tank group, 55b, 66-71
Right valve grip, 74
Rocker arm, 49, 74, 75a
-S-
Safety, grip, 14c, 62, 74
Safety-head plug, 37, 39, 51d, 69
Safety head, replacement, 51d, 54b, 55f, 56b, 59, 69
Screening effect, 3, 34
Screw drivers, 10a, 48a, 52f, 74c, 75d, 76b
Seine cord
description, 71a
installation, 71c
Page 164
replacement, 48b, 60, 71e
tightening, 51h, 60, 71d
Service kit, 48
Service, on receipt of equipment, 12, 13
Set-screw wrenches, 10a, 48a, 67d, 76b, 76c
Shield, ignition, 18, 52d, 54a, 55d, 76
Shipment, 77
Short range, causes of, 61
Sighting, 25
Skids, use of, 24
Smoke, 3, 34
Smoking, 15, 40d
Snap ring, 76
Soaking the target, 29
Spare parts in service kit, 48, 77a
Spare parts kit, 10b
Spray of fuel, 61a
Spring case
cleaning, 52j, 76d
description, 76
effects of dust, 42, 52j
general, 10b, 18, 31, 76
lubrication at, 49, 52j, 76d
maintenance, 76d
replacement, 48b, 63b, 76d
Spring retainer and plug, 52g, 75
Spring, trigger, 63d, 76
Spring-type regulator, 67d
Spring, valve, 75
Spring, valve-grip, 74
Stem, pressure valve, 66d
Storage
charging lines, 42
cylinders, 33, 77a
tightening, 51h, 60, 71d
Service kit, 48
Service, on receipt of equipment, 12, 13
Set-screw wrenches, 10a, 48a, 67d, 76b, 76c
Shield, ignition, 18, 52d, 54a, 55d, 76
Shipment, 77
Short range, causes of, 61
Sighting, 25
Skids, use of, 24
Smoke, 3, 34
Smoking, 15, 40d
Snap ring, 76
Soaking the target, 29
Spare parts in service kit, 48, 77a
Spare parts kit, 10b
Spray of fuel, 61a
Spring case
cleaning, 52j, 76d
description, 76
effects of dust, 42, 52j
general, 10b, 18, 31, 76
lubrication at, 49, 52j, 76d
maintenance, 76d
replacement, 48b, 63b, 76d
Spring retainer and plug, 52g, 75
Spring, trigger, 63d, 76
Spring-type regulator, 67d
Spring, valve, 75
Spring, valve-grip, 74
Stem, pressure valve, 66d
Storage
charging lines, 42
cylinders, 33, 77a
Page 165
filling lines, 42
flame thrower, 12, 30f, 41, 42, 77
fuel, 35j, 36i, 40
ignition cylinders, 31
Straps, adjustment, 19, 51i, 60b, 71d
Sun, exposure of flame thrower to, 40, 43
Support, diaphragm, 75
-T-
Tactics, 3, 4e
Tank connector, 68a
Tank coupling
cleaning, 70d
description, 70a
installation, 70c
leaks, 58, 70d
maintenance, 51c, 70c, 70d, 73d
operation, 17, 70, 73a
removal, 70b
testing, 51c
Tank group
adjustment, 66-71
carrying, 19, 24, 55b, 71
connecting to gun, 4g, 17, 70
description, 5a, 65-71
dimensions, 9d
interchanging, 4g, 17, 70
installation, 66-71
maintenance, 66-71
preventive maintenance, 50, 51, 53-56
removal, 55b, 66-71
requisitioning, 5a
weight, 9c
Targets, 3, 25
Temperature, effects of, 34-36, 40, 43, 44, 49, 64
flame thrower, 12, 30f, 41, 42, 77
fuel, 35j, 36i, 40
ignition cylinders, 31
Straps, adjustment, 19, 51i, 60b, 71d
Sun, exposure of flame thrower to, 40, 43
Support, diaphragm, 75
-T-
Tactics, 3, 4e
Tank connector, 68a
Tank coupling
cleaning, 70d
description, 70a
installation, 70c
leaks, 58, 70d
maintenance, 51c, 70c, 70d, 73d
operation, 17, 70, 73a
removal, 70b
testing, 51c
Tank group
adjustment, 66-71
carrying, 19, 24, 55b, 71
connecting to gun, 4g, 17, 70
description, 5a, 65-71
dimensions, 9d
interchanging, 4g, 17, 70
installation, 66-71
maintenance, 66-71
preventive maintenance, 50, 51, 53-56
removal, 55b, 66-71
requisitioning, 5a
weight, 9c
Targets, 3, 25
Temperature, effects of, 34-36, 40, 43, 44, 49, 64
Page 166
Test firing, 12k, 35k, 36h, 56b
Thickened fuel
aiming, 25c, 26c
characteristics, 34
filling, 37-39
precautions, 35, 39, 40
preparation, 35, 40
ranges, 22, 34
Thickener
destruction, 46e
quantity, 9g, 35
storage, 35
use, 35
Time of discharge, 9b
Tool kit, 10a, 77a
Training, 15, 30a
Trigger, 14b, 26a, 49, 52, 63, 76
Trigger rod
description, 76a
lubrication, 49
maintenance, 52l, 76d
Trigger screw, 76
Trigger spring, 52k, 63d, 76
-U-
Underbrush, 22b
Uses of flame throwers, 3
-V-
Valve-adjusting wrench
source, 48a
use, 75d
Valve, pressure-tank, 75
Valve-diaphragm assembly, 10, 48b, 56c, 58a, 74, 75
Valve flexible shaft
adjustment, 66d
Thickened fuel
aiming, 25c, 26c
characteristics, 34
filling, 37-39
precautions, 35, 39, 40
preparation, 35, 40
ranges, 22, 34
Thickener
destruction, 46e
quantity, 9g, 35
storage, 35
use, 35
Time of discharge, 9b
Tool kit, 10a, 77a
Training, 15, 30a
Trigger, 14b, 26a, 49, 52, 63, 76
Trigger rod
description, 76a
lubrication, 49
maintenance, 52l, 76d
Trigger screw, 76
Trigger spring, 52k, 63d, 76
-U-
Underbrush, 22b
Uses of flame throwers, 3
-V-
Valve-adjusting wrench
source, 48a
use, 75d
Valve, pressure-tank, 75
Valve-diaphragm assembly, 10, 48b, 56c, 58a, 74, 75
Valve flexible shaft
adjustment, 66d
Page 167
description, 66a
installation, 66c
lubrication, 49
removal, 66b
Valve grip
action, 14c, 74a
description, 74a
effects of dirt, 42
installation, 74c
leaks, 58a
lubrication, 49, 56d, 74d
maintenance, 74d
removal, 74b
Valve-grip spring, 74
Valve lever
description, 74a
installation, 74c
lubrication, 49
operation, 14c, 62, 74a
play, 52e
removal, 74b
Valve needle
adjustment, 52e, 75d
cleaning, 52, 55d
description, 75a
installation, 75c
leaks, 58
removal, 75b, 75e
Valve, fuel
adjustment, 61a
cleaning, 56f, 61d
description, 5b, 74a, 75a
effects of dirt, 42
failure to close, 62
installation, 66c
lubrication, 49
removal, 66b
Valve grip
action, 14c, 74a
description, 74a
effects of dirt, 42
installation, 74c
leaks, 58a
lubrication, 49, 56d, 74d
maintenance, 74d
removal, 74b
Valve-grip spring, 74
Valve lever
description, 74a
installation, 74c
lubrication, 49
operation, 14c, 62, 74a
play, 52e
removal, 74b
Valve needle
adjustment, 52e, 75d
cleaning, 52, 55d
description, 75a
installation, 75c
leaks, 58
removal, 75b, 75e
Valve, fuel
adjustment, 61a
cleaning, 56f, 61d
description, 5b, 74a, 75a
effects of dirt, 42
failure to close, 62
Page 168
installation, 61a, 74c, 75c
leaks, 56c, 58
lubrication, 49
operation, 14c, 26b, 61a, 74a, 75a
removal, 74c, 75c
testing, 56c
Valve pressure-tank
description, 5a, 66a
effects of dirt, 42
installation, 66c
operation, 14a, 21, 55g, 61b
removal, 66b
replacement, 48b, 66e
testing, 51a, 53c
Valve spring, 75
Void in fuel tanks, 53b, 68a
-W-
Washer, coupling, 10b, 48b, 70, 73d
Washer, diaphragm, 75
Water
and ignition cylinder, 31, 41
effect on fuel, 35e
effect on thickener, 35e
effect on weapon, 41, 51g, 71e
use in testing, 56b, 67d
use in training, 15
Weights, 4d, 9c
Wind, effects of, 23, 45
Wrenches, 10a, 48a, 67d
-Y-
Yoke, 75
Yoke block, 75
Yoke shaft, 75
leaks, 56c, 58
lubrication, 49
operation, 14c, 26b, 61a, 74a, 75a
removal, 74c, 75c
testing, 56c
Valve pressure-tank
description, 5a, 66a
effects of dirt, 42
installation, 66c
operation, 14a, 21, 55g, 61b
removal, 66b
replacement, 48b, 66e
testing, 51a, 53c
Valve spring, 75
Void in fuel tanks, 53b, 68a
-W-
Washer, coupling, 10b, 48b, 70, 73d
Washer, diaphragm, 75
Water
and ignition cylinder, 31, 41
effect on fuel, 35e
effect on thickener, 35e
effect on weapon, 41, 51g, 71e
use in testing, 56b, 67d
use in training, 15
Weights, 4d, 9c
Wind, effects of, 23, 45
Wrenches, 10a, 48a, 67d
-Y-
Yoke, 75
Yoke block, 75
Yoke shaft, 75
Page 169
Page 170
Page 171
NOTES
Page 172
REPRODUCTION PLANT
CHEMICAL WARFARE SCHOOL
EDGEWOOD ARSENAL MD
1944
Transcriber’s Notes:
The original accentuation, spelling, punctuation and hyphenation has been retained,
except for apparent typographical errors.
CHEMICAL WARFARE SCHOOL
EDGEWOOD ARSENAL MD
1944
Transcriber’s Notes:
The original accentuation, spelling, punctuation and hyphenation has been retained,
except for apparent typographical errors.
Page 173
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PORTABLE
FLAME THROWER M2-2 ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
FLAME THROWER M2-2 ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
Page 174
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
Page 175
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
Page 176
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived from
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
Page 177
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing,
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
Page 178
Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
Page 179
you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
Page 180
efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
Page 181
including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
Page 182
copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.